When a quick sound bite won’t do

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 16:04
Display Headline
When a quick sound bite won’t do

Over the past year we have read about intervention trials in patients with chronic atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease1 and diabetes1,2 that yielded surprising results. These trials have prompted some to question the most basic underpinning of our management of these diseases, ie, that aggressively lowering low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) and glucose (hemoglobin A1c) truly helps our patients.

The sound bites about these trials in the news have confused physicians and patients alike. But, as we have all experienced during this election year, to understand complex problems requires an in-depth analysis instead of a sound bite.

I was troubled by the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial,2 in which more patients who were treated with an intense hemoglobin A1c-lowering strategy died (mostly of macrovascular events) than those treated with a standard strategy. Older data showing a beneficial effect of glucose-lowering on the microvascular complications of diabetes are solid. I did not understand the mechanistic basis of the ACCORD results, unless the very aggressive therapy caused many hypoglycemic events with catecholamine surges, resulting in stroke or myocardial infarction, or whether a problem with a specific drug arose more often in the intensive-treatment group. There has been similar dialogue surrounding intensity of glucose control in critically ill inpatients3; here, the data suggest that hypoglycemic episodes may limit other benefits of aggressive treatment in the intensive care unit, such as reduced infection rates.

Not to be ignored is that the patients in all arms of the ACCORD trial fared far better than historical diabetic controls. The meticulous attention to management of blood pressure and LDL-C that all patients in the ACCORD trial received paid off. (If only we could do as well in our practices!) But what do we do about the sugar?

This large, well-done, ongoing trial deserves a detailed analysis for those of us who need to translate the conclusions regarding glucose control to our patients. This month in the Journal, I have invited Byron Hoogwerf, a clinical diabetologist, former internal medicine program director, well-published clinical trialist, and ACCORD investigator, to provide this analysis.4 His discussion is more detailed than what we often print purposefully, and it is well worth reading. Some issues simply can’t be understood as a sound bite.

References
  1. Kastelein JJ, Akdim F, Stroes ES, et alENHANCE Investigators. Simvastatin with or without ezetimibe in familial hypercholesterolemia. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:14311443.
  2. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  3. Soylemez Wiener R, Wiener DC, Larson RJ. Benefits and risks of tight glucose control in critically ill adults: a meta-analysis. JAMA. 2008; 300:933944.
  4. Hoogwerf BF. A clinician and clinical trialist’s perspective: does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD. Cleve Clin J Med. 2008; 75:729737.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Brian F. Mandell, MD, PhD
Editor in Chief

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
686
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Brian F. Mandell, MD, PhD
Editor in Chief

Author and Disclosure Information

Brian F. Mandell, MD, PhD
Editor in Chief

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Over the past year we have read about intervention trials in patients with chronic atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease1 and diabetes1,2 that yielded surprising results. These trials have prompted some to question the most basic underpinning of our management of these diseases, ie, that aggressively lowering low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) and glucose (hemoglobin A1c) truly helps our patients.

The sound bites about these trials in the news have confused physicians and patients alike. But, as we have all experienced during this election year, to understand complex problems requires an in-depth analysis instead of a sound bite.

I was troubled by the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial,2 in which more patients who were treated with an intense hemoglobin A1c-lowering strategy died (mostly of macrovascular events) than those treated with a standard strategy. Older data showing a beneficial effect of glucose-lowering on the microvascular complications of diabetes are solid. I did not understand the mechanistic basis of the ACCORD results, unless the very aggressive therapy caused many hypoglycemic events with catecholamine surges, resulting in stroke or myocardial infarction, or whether a problem with a specific drug arose more often in the intensive-treatment group. There has been similar dialogue surrounding intensity of glucose control in critically ill inpatients3; here, the data suggest that hypoglycemic episodes may limit other benefits of aggressive treatment in the intensive care unit, such as reduced infection rates.

Not to be ignored is that the patients in all arms of the ACCORD trial fared far better than historical diabetic controls. The meticulous attention to management of blood pressure and LDL-C that all patients in the ACCORD trial received paid off. (If only we could do as well in our practices!) But what do we do about the sugar?

This large, well-done, ongoing trial deserves a detailed analysis for those of us who need to translate the conclusions regarding glucose control to our patients. This month in the Journal, I have invited Byron Hoogwerf, a clinical diabetologist, former internal medicine program director, well-published clinical trialist, and ACCORD investigator, to provide this analysis.4 His discussion is more detailed than what we often print purposefully, and it is well worth reading. Some issues simply can’t be understood as a sound bite.

Over the past year we have read about intervention trials in patients with chronic atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease1 and diabetes1,2 that yielded surprising results. These trials have prompted some to question the most basic underpinning of our management of these diseases, ie, that aggressively lowering low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) and glucose (hemoglobin A1c) truly helps our patients.

The sound bites about these trials in the news have confused physicians and patients alike. But, as we have all experienced during this election year, to understand complex problems requires an in-depth analysis instead of a sound bite.

I was troubled by the results of the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial,2 in which more patients who were treated with an intense hemoglobin A1c-lowering strategy died (mostly of macrovascular events) than those treated with a standard strategy. Older data showing a beneficial effect of glucose-lowering on the microvascular complications of diabetes are solid. I did not understand the mechanistic basis of the ACCORD results, unless the very aggressive therapy caused many hypoglycemic events with catecholamine surges, resulting in stroke or myocardial infarction, or whether a problem with a specific drug arose more often in the intensive-treatment group. There has been similar dialogue surrounding intensity of glucose control in critically ill inpatients3; here, the data suggest that hypoglycemic episodes may limit other benefits of aggressive treatment in the intensive care unit, such as reduced infection rates.

Not to be ignored is that the patients in all arms of the ACCORD trial fared far better than historical diabetic controls. The meticulous attention to management of blood pressure and LDL-C that all patients in the ACCORD trial received paid off. (If only we could do as well in our practices!) But what do we do about the sugar?

This large, well-done, ongoing trial deserves a detailed analysis for those of us who need to translate the conclusions regarding glucose control to our patients. This month in the Journal, I have invited Byron Hoogwerf, a clinical diabetologist, former internal medicine program director, well-published clinical trialist, and ACCORD investigator, to provide this analysis.4 His discussion is more detailed than what we often print purposefully, and it is well worth reading. Some issues simply can’t be understood as a sound bite.

References
  1. Kastelein JJ, Akdim F, Stroes ES, et alENHANCE Investigators. Simvastatin with or without ezetimibe in familial hypercholesterolemia. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:14311443.
  2. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  3. Soylemez Wiener R, Wiener DC, Larson RJ. Benefits and risks of tight glucose control in critically ill adults: a meta-analysis. JAMA. 2008; 300:933944.
  4. Hoogwerf BF. A clinician and clinical trialist’s perspective: does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD. Cleve Clin J Med. 2008; 75:729737.
References
  1. Kastelein JJ, Akdim F, Stroes ES, et alENHANCE Investigators. Simvastatin with or without ezetimibe in familial hypercholesterolemia. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:14311443.
  2. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  3. Soylemez Wiener R, Wiener DC, Larson RJ. Benefits and risks of tight glucose control in critically ill adults: a meta-analysis. JAMA. 2008; 300:933944.
  4. Hoogwerf BF. A clinician and clinical trialist’s perspective: does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD. Cleve Clin J Med. 2008; 75:729737.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Page Number
686
Page Number
686
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
When a quick sound bite won’t do
Display Headline
When a quick sound bite won’t do
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

Does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 16:04
Display Headline
Does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD
A clinician and clinical trialist's perspective

The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial1–5 was designed primarily to address, in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, whether intensive glucose control would result in a lower risk of atherosclerotic disease events or death than would standard treatment.

It was widely expected that intensive treatment would confer either modest benefit or, at worst, no benefit. However, the glucose-lowering arm of the trial was terminated early because of a higher mortality rate in the intensively treated group. (The ACCORD trial has two other arms, which concern blood pressure and lipid-lowering, and these are continuing.)

In earlier trials in type 2 diabetes, concerns had been raised about an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly death associated with glucose-lowering drugs, hypoglycemia itself, or both, and these were well known when ACCORD was convened. ACCORD was very carefully designed and included careful adjudication of each cardiovascular event and death, including whether hypoglycemia might have been a proximate cause of some sudden deaths.5

Therefore, the surprising result of the higher mortality rate with intensive glycemic control in ACCORD will be fodder for discussion in many arenas over the next several years, and it poses some challenges for physicians and patients in determining treatment goals, as well as for organizations that write clinical practice guidelines (and perhaps organizations involved in pay-for-performance based on these guidelines).

Still, I believe that the ACCORD results should not substantially change our approach to treatment goals in type 2 diabetes, although hemoglobin A1c targets below 6% may not have much added value for cardiovascular risk reduction. The low overall mortality rate in all the arms of the ACCORD trial emphasizes the importance of lifestyle modification, lipid and blood pressure therapy, and encouragement of aspirin use in all patients with type 2 diabetes.

This article reflects my views as a practicing diabetologist and clinical trialist (I was an investigator in the ACCORD trial) with a long-standing interest in clinical trials and in how the results influence clinical practice. The views I express herein may not reflect the views of other ACCORD investigators, the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI), the ACCORD trial coordinating center at Wake Forest University, or its data safety and monitoring board.

RISK OF CORONARY DISEASE INCREASES WITH GLUCOSE

Many observational studies6–10 have shown that the risk of cardiovascular disease, especially coronary heart disease, is two to five times higher in people with diabetes mellitus than in people without diabetes. The risk appears to be continuous, so the higher one’s glucose or hemoglobin A1c, the higher the risk.6 This risk even extends to glucose values well below the threshold values currently used to diagnose diabetes mellitus.6 Since there is no glucose threshold for coronary heart disease, the term dysglycemia (rather than hyperglycemia) has been proposed to note the relationship between glucose and coronary heart disease. (The glucose threshold for microvascular complications of diabetes, such as retinopathy and nephropathy, appears to be between 110 and 126 mg/dL).

The clustering of multiple coronary risk factors such as obesity, dyslipidemia, and hypertension has always raised the question of whether glucose is a culprit in coronary risk or whether it simply “runs in bad company.”

EARLIER CLINICAL TRIALS SUGGEST INTENSIVE TREATMENT RAISES RISK

Even though it has been widely believed that intensive glucose-lowering would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes, there have been hints in previous studies that some intensive-treatment regimens might increase risk.

Two large randomized clinical trials and one small one (discussed below) addressed whether glucose control would reduce the risk of atherosclerotic vascular disease events. In each of them, an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly of death was seen in at least one intensively treated group.

In the following discussion, I have calculated all of the death rates as the number of deaths per 1,000 patients per year, based on published study results. In this way, we can compare the rates in the various studies (including ACCORD), regardless of the trial duration.

The university group Diabetes Program: Controvery about tolbutamide therapy

The University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP)11–16 included about 1,000 participants randomized to five treatments: tolbutamide (Orinase, a sulfonylurea), insulin in a fixed dose based on body weight, insulin in adjusted doses based on fasting glucose levels, placebo, and (later) phenformin.

In the 1970s, when the UGDP was carried out, randomized clinical trials were uncommon. Like other trials from that era, the UGDP was underpowered by today’s standards and did not have a data safety and monitoring board.

Rates of cardiovascular events and deaths (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 25 (tolbutamide group)
  • 12 (placebo group).

The two insulin groups did not differ from the placebo group in their rates of cardiovascular events or death.15 The tolbutamide arm was stopped, and the ensuing controversy about how to interpret the trial results lasted for more than a decade. It also resulted in a black-box warning for tolbutamide and all subsequent sulfonylureas.

 

 

United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study: Method of glucose-lowering an issue

The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)17–27 was launched in 1977. A cohort of 5,102 patients (mean age 54 years) with newly diagnosed type 2 diabetes mellitus followed a “prudent diet” for the first 3 to 4 months. Then, if their fasting glucose levels were in the range of 6.1 to 15 mmol/L (110–270 mg/dL), they were randomized to receive various treatments.

Patients who were not obese were randomized to receive either intensive treatment or conventional treatment. The intensive-treatment group received either insulin or a sulfonylurea (chlorpropamide [Diabinese], glibenclamide, or glipizide [Glucotrol]); the conventional-treatment group received diet therapy. The sulfonylurea arm was included partly to address the UGDP results.

Patients who were obese were randomized to receive one of three treatments: intensive treatment (with the agents listed above), conventional treatment, or metformin (Fortamet, Glucophage).

The mean in-trial hemoglobin A1c level in the intensive-treatment group was 7.0%, compared with 7.9% in the conventional-treatment group.

After a mean follow-up of more than 10 years, the incidence of myocardial infarction was 16% lower in the intensive-treatment group, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .052).

Rates of death from all causes among nonobese subjects (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 18.2–20.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 19.9 (conventional-treatment group).

In the obese patients who received metformin, the incidence of myocardial infarction was lower than in the conventional-treatment group but not the intensive-treatment group.

Rates of death among obese patients (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 13.5 (metformin group)
  • 18.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 20.6 (conventional-treatment group).

However, a small subset (n = 587) of the original group assigned to sulfonylurea therapy whose glycemic control deteriorated during the trial were rerandomized to continue to receive a sulfonylurea alone or to have metformin added. There was a statistically significantly higher rate of cardiovascular events and a nonsignificantly higher rate of total mortality in the metformin-plus-sulfonylurea group (30.3 per 1,000 patient-years) than in the sulfonylurea-only group (19.1 per 1,000 patient-years).

These data suggested that the way glucose-lowering was achieved might be as important as the glucose levels actually achieved. However, no definite conclusions could be drawn.

In an editorial on the UKPDS, Nathan26 made a comment that may have been prescient in terms of the ACCORD trial: “Professional organizations will now scramble to decide how to translate the UKPDS results … Whether the UKPDS firmly establishes the choice of any one therapy…or any combination of therapies for the long-term treatment of type 2 diabetes is more questionable.”26

Veterans Administration feasibility study

A Veterans Administration feasibility study28,29 included 153 men (mean age 60) with type 2 diabetes (mean duration 7.8 years) who received either conventional therapy (a single daily dose of insulin) or intensive therapy (multiple doses of insulin plus a sulfonylurea). Over a mean of 27 months, the intensive-therapy group achieved a hemoglobin A1c level that was 2 percentage points lower than in the conventional-therapy group.

At 2.25 years of follow-up, cardiovascular events had occurred in 24 (24%) of the intensive-therapy group and in 16 (20%) of the standard-therapy group (P = .10).

Rates of death from all causes (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 28.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 17.5 (conventional-treatment group).

ACCORD TRIAL DESIGN

ACCORD had a double two-by-two factorial design: all of the more than 10,000 patients were randomly assigned to undergo either intensive or standard glucose-lowering therapy; in addition, approximately half were randomly assigned to receive either aggressive or standard antihypertensive therapy, and the other half were randomly assigned to receive one of two lipid-lowering regimens (Table 1).

The primary outcome measured was the combined incidence of nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes. Secondary outcomes included death from any cause. The study is also evaluating the effect of intensive treatment on microvascular disease, hypoglycemia, cognition, quality of life, and cost-effectiveness.

The ACCORD study was designed to have 89% power to detect a 15% treatment effect of intensive glycemic control compared with standard glycemic control for the primary end point.

ACCORD RESULTS

Participants in ACCORD were between the ages of 40 and 82 at randomization and were generally at high risk of coronary heart disease on the basis of having multiple risk factors or a prior event. Table 2 summarizes their baseline characteristics.3

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 1. Median hemoglobin A1c levels at each study visit in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Bars denote interquartile ranges.
At 1 year, the median hemoglobin A1c value had fallen from 8.1% at baseline to 6.4% in the intensive-treatment group and to 7.5% in the standard-treatment group, and these values remained stable throughout the rest of the trial (Figure 1).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 2. Kaplan-Meier curves for the combined primary outcome (the first occurrence of nonfatal myocardial infarction or nonfatal stroke or death from cardiovascular causes) in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
At a median of 3.4 years, the primary outcome (nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes) had occurred in 6.9% of the intensive-therapy group compared with 7.2% of the standard-therapy group (hazard ratio [HR] 0.90, 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.78–1.04, P = .16) (Figure 2).1 The difference was primarily due to a lower rate of nonfatal myocardial infarction in the intensive-therapy group (n = 186, 3.6%) than in the standard-therapy group (n = 235, 4.6%; HR 0.76, 95% CI 0.62–0.92, P = .004).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 3. Kaplan-Meier curves for death from any cause in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
However, on February 6, 2008, the ACCORD trial announced that 257 (5%) of the patients in the intensive-treatment group had died, compared with 203 (4%) of the standard-treatment group, a 20% difference (P = .04) (Figure 3).1

Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 14 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 11 (standard-treatment group).

Although this difference was relatively small by some standards, it was statistically significant (P = .04).1 The number needed to harm was 333 patients for 1 excess death. The difference was attributable to cardiovascular deaths (Table 3).1

In the analyses available at the time that this study arm closed, the excess mortality was not attributable to any particular treatment regimen. In particular, rosiglitazone (Avandia) use did not contribute to the excess mortality. (Of note, 91.2% of the intensive-treatment group and 57.5% of the conventional-treatment group had been treated with rosiglitazone, with more than 19,000 patient-years of rosiglitazone exposure). The excess mortality was also not attributable to hypoglycemia immediately proximate to the death.

The ACCORD trial’s data safety and monitoring board recommended that this arm of the study be discontinued for safety reasons, and this recommendation was accepted by the NHLBI project office. All participants were notified by letter before the trial results were announced publicly, and all intensive-therapy group participants are now being treated by the protocol used in the standard-therapy group.1

 

 

FEWER DEATHS IN ACCORD THAN IN OTHER STUDIES IN DIABETES

The mortality rates in both arms of ACCORD were much lower than in other observational studies and clinical trials in type 2 diabetes.

The National Health and Nutrition Education Survey (NHANES),30 conducted from 1971 to 1975, included 14,374 people with diabetes between the ages of 25 and 74. Many of them were younger than the ACCORD patients, but two NHANES age-groups overlapped the ACCORD cohort. Rates of death from any cause at 22 years (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 39.7 (ages 45–64)
  • 89.7 (ages 65–74).

The NHANES cohort would not have been treated as vigorously for coronary risk and other common causes of death.

UGDP, UKPDS. Death rates in the glucose-lowering trials of type 2 diabetes mellitus cited above were typically in the range of 20 deaths per 1,000 patient-years but were as high as 30 deaths per 1,000 patient-years in the UGDP tolbutamide group16 and the UK-PDS sulfonylurea-plus-metformin group.20,22,26

Steno-2.31 Half of 160 patients with type 2 diabetes were randomized to intensive strategies for controlling glucose, lipids, and blood pressure and for taking aspirin and angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors and following a healthy lifestyle. The other half received conventional therapy. Even in the intensive-treatment group, the mortality rate at 13 years was higher than in ACCORD. Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient years):

  • 22.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 37.6 (conventional-treatment group).

After the ACCORD results were presented, two other trials addressing the question of whether lower hemoglobin A1c would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes have reported their outcomes:

The ADVANCE trial (Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation),32,33 with 11,140 patients, had a target hemoglobin A1c of 6.5% in an intensive-treatment group and 7.3% in a usual-treatment group. The intensive-treatment group showed no difference in the rates of major macrovascular events (HR 0.94, 95% CI 0.84–1.06, P = .32) or all-cause mortality (HR 0.93, 95% CI 0.83–1.06, P = .32). The overall death rate in ADVANCE (about 18 deaths per 1,000 patient-years) was higher than in ACCORD.

The Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial included 1,791 patients.34 Like the ADVANCE trial, it also found no difference in major cardiovascular outcomes (HR 0.868, P = .11) or cardiovascular mortality rates (HR 1.258, P = .36) with intensive therapy vs conventional therapy, ie, achieved hemoglobin A1c levels of 6.9% vs 8.4% (presented at the American Diabetes Association 2008 Scientific Sessions). Hypoglycemia was associated with an increased risk of death in the standard-treatment group.

An analysis suggested that patients with a shorter duration of diabetes may have had cardiovascular benefit from intensive glucose-lowering, while those who had had it longer may have had increased risk associated with the more intensive therapy. The rate of death from all causes appears to have been higher than in ACCORD, but this could not be determined accurately from the presentations.

Comment. Thus, the ACCORD cohort as a whole has had strikingly lower death rates than in these other studies. The fact that all participants had lower glucose levels on therapy than at baseline may possibly contribute to these lower death rates. In addition, all ACCORD participants in the lipid arm received a statin; all participants in the blood pressure arm had their blood pressure lowered to levels below those commonly seen in clinical practice; participants were encouraged to exercise regularly; most participants were given diet instruction; and other healthy behaviors such as aspirin use, regular follow-up with primary care physicians, and recommendations about smoking were encouraged throughout the study. These comprehensive strategies may represent better care and thus result in lower death rates than in other studies.

POSSIBLE EXPLANATIONS FOR THE ACCORD OUTCOMES

The ACCORD trial has already stimulated fierce debate about the reasons for the higher mortality rate in the intensive-treatment group. With longer follow-up, some new risk factors for death may be identified that are not evident in the analyses of the current 460 deaths. What follows are some of my thoughts, with the caveat that they are not confirmed (supported statistically) by any currently available analyses from ACCORD.

It seems unlikely that lower glucose values as reflected by lower hemoglobin A1c values in the intensive-treatment group are an a priori explanation for the observed differences in mortality rates—especially since the mortality rates were lower than in the NHANES and clinical trial data sets cited above. If we assume that a type 1 statistical error (finding a difference where no difference actually exists) does not explain the findings, then at least four reasonable postulates exist:

Hypoglycemia may have some adverse effect, either acutely or from recurrent events that trigger a catecholamine response with associated risk for arrhythmia or increased coronary heart disease risk. However, the investigators analyzed each death to determine whether hypoglycemia was a contributing cause, and they found no statistically significant relationship between hypoglycemia and death in the intensive-treatment group.

Weight gain is common with intensive therapy. Obesity may be associated with greater cytokine production, higher concentrations of clotting factors, higher levels of free fatty acids, and other potential contributors to the risk of coronary heart disease and death. Currently, the ACCORD analyses do not suggest that weight gain explains the higher death rate.

Medications such as rosiglitazone, sulfonylureas, and the combination of a sulfonylurea plus metformin have been previously associated with increased death rates in some observational and intervention trials. These studies had some serious methodologic limitations (eg, absence of risk adjustment, events not adjudicated, small study cohorts, wide variation in study cohort characteristics) and small numbers of events.11–13,16,26,35 ACCORD analyses have not shown that any single glucose-lowering agent—including rosiglitazone—or combination of agents explains the death rates.

The stress of maintaining glycemic control has been speculated to have in some way contributed to an increased risk. To achieve intensive control, patients had to have frequent contact with their health care providers, they were often told that their hemoglobin A1c values were “too high” even when they were well below those in the American Diabetes Association guidelines, and they had to follow complex glucose-lowering regimens.

Semiquantitative measures of overall attitudes about health exist (eg, the “Feeling Thermometer” scale), but stress was not measured quantitatively in the ACCORD trial.

 

 

IMPLICATIONS OF ACCORD

In practice, most clinicians believe that the target glucose level in patients with type 2 diabetes should be as low as safely possible. This approach does not need to be modified on the basis of current information from ACCORD.

To be safe, regimens should be associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and a low risk of weight gain. Use of combinations of medications that work by different mechanisms is still prudent. Agents should be used that may have favorable effects on other cardiovascular risk factors (eg, lipids, blood pressure, visceral fat).

Hemoglobin A1c targets below 7% are not precluded in all patients on the basis of the ACCORD results, though values lower than 6% may not have much added benefit for cardiovascular risk reduction. We should note that hemoglobin A1c was reduced in all ACCORD participants and that death rates were lower than in many other type 2 diabetic cohorts. Pending data on other outcomes in ACCORD (nephropathy, retinopathy, dementia, fracture risk), I believe it is premature for organizations to change their proposed hemoglobin A1c targets,36,37 as none have proposed values as low as the target in the ACCORD intensive-treatment group. At present, no class of glucose-lowering agents needs to be excluded from consideration on the basis of the ACCORD data.

The overall low rates of death in this population at high risk of coronary heart disease deserve comment. Not only are they lower than in other glucose-lowering trials, but they are also lower than in a number of studies of mortality in diabetes cohorts. As noted above, multiple risk factors for coronary heart disease and death were (and are) addressed in the ACCORD study participants, including repeated recommendation for lifestyle modification, intervention arms with lipid and blood pressure therapy, encouragement of aspirin use, and regular follow-up with health care providers for risk factors not managed by the ACCORD trial protocol. It is likely that multiple approaches to reducing the risk of cardiovascular disease contributed to this low mortality rate and that similar approaches will reduce the risk of coronary disease and death in regular clinical practice.

The ACCORD lipid and blood pressure arms are continuing, with results expected in 2010. The future results from ACCORD as well as from several glucose-lowering trials currently in progress (ADVANCE,32,33 Veteran’s Administration,34 Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes [BARI-2D]38) will likely help refine our understanding of the effects of glucose-lowering, glucose-lowering strategies and targets, and multiple interventions on coronary events and all-cause mortality.

For now, any strategy that lowers glucose and is associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and does not cause excessive weight gain should be considered appropriate in patients with type 2 diabetes.

References
  1. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  2. Goff DC, Gerstein HC, Ginsberg HN, et al. Prevention of cardiovascular disease in persons with type 2 diabetes mellitus: current knowledge and rationale for the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:4i20i.
  3. Buse JB, Bigger JT, Byington RP, et al. Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial: design and methods. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:21i33i.
  4. Gerstein HC, Riddle MC, Kendall DM, et al. Glycemia treatment strategies in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:34i43i.
  5. Bonds DE, Kurashige EM, Bergenstal R, et al. Severe hypoglycemia monitoring and risk management procedures in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:80i89i.
  6. Gerstein HC. Dysglycemia, not just diabetes, is a continuous risk factor for cardiovascular disease. Evid Based Cardiovasc Med. 1997; 1:8788.
  7. Gerstein HC, Pais P, Pogue J, Yusuf S. Relationship of glucose and insulin levels to the risk of myocardial infarction: a case-control study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 1999; 33:612619.
  8. Gerstein HC, Capes SE. Dysglycemia: a key cardiovascular risk factor. Semin Vasc Med. 2002; 2:165174.
  9. Gerstein HC, Santaguida P, Raina P, et al. Annual incidence and relative risk of diabetes in people with various categories of dysglycemia: a systematic overview and meta-analysis of prospective studies. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2007; 78:305312.
  10. American Diabetes Association. Role of cardiovascular risk factors in prevention and treatment of macrovascular disease in diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1989; 12:573579.
  11. Schor S. The University Group Diabetes Program. A statistician looks at the mortality results. JAMA. 1971; 217:16711675.
  12. Cornfield JThe University Group Diabetes Program. A further statistical analysis of the mortality findings. JAMA. 1971; 217:16761687.
  13. Feinstein AR. Clinical biostatistics. 8. An analytic appraisal of the University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP) study. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1971; 12:167191.
  14. The University Group Diabetes Program. A study of the effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. V. Evaluation of pheniformin therapy. Diabetes 1975; 24( suppl 1):65184.
  15. Knatterud GL, Klimt CR, Levin ME, Jacobson ME, Goldner MG. Effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. VII. Mortality and selected nonfatal events with insulin treatment. JAMA. 1978; 240:3742.
  16. Schwartz TB, Meinert CL. The UGDP controversy: thirty-four years of contentious ambiguity laid to rest. Perspect Biol Med. 2004; 47:564574.
  17. Turner RC, Holman RR. Lessons from UK Prospective Diabetes Study. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 1995; 28( suppl):S151S157.
  18. UKPDS Research Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:854865.
  19. UKPDS Study Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:837853.
  20. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UKPDS 28: a randomized trial of efficacy of early addition of metformin in sulfonylurea-treated type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:8792.
  21. Bretzel RG, Voigt K, Schatz H. The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) implications for the pharmacotherapy of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Exp Clin Endocrinol Diabetes. 1998; 106:369372.
  22. Turner RC, Cull CA, Frighi V, Holman RR. Glycemic control with diet, sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: progressive requirement for multiple therapies (UKPDS 49). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. JAMA. 1999; 281:20052012.
  23. Leslie RD. United Kingdom prospective diabetes study (UKPDS): what now or so what? Diabetes Metab Res Rev 1999; 15:6571.
  24. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ. 2000; 321:405412.
  25. Mooradian AD, Chehade J. Implications of the UK Prospective Diabetes Study: questions answered and issues remaining. Drugs Aging. 2000; 16:159164.
  26. Nathan DM. Some answers, more controversy, from UKPDS. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study. Lancet. 1998; 352:832833.
  27. Srimanunthiphol J, Beddow R, Arakaki R. A review of the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) and a discussion of the implications for patient care. Hawaii Med J. 2000; 59:295298.
  28. Duckworth WC, McCarren M, Abraira C. Glucose control and cardiovascular complications: the VA Diabetes Trial. Diabetes Care. 2001; 24:942945.
  29. Abraira C, Colwell JA, Nuttall FQ, et al. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study on glycemic control and complications in type II diabetes (VA CSDM). Results of the feasibility trial. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study in Type II Diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1995; 18:11131123.
  30. Gu K, Cowie CC, Harris MI. Mortality in adults with and without diabetes in a national cohort of the U.S. population, 1971–1993. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:11381145. NHANES
  31. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:580591.
  32. Patel A, MacMahon S, Chalmers J, et al. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25602572.
  33. Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: PreterAx and DiamicroN Modified-Release Controlled Evaluation. Rationale and design of the ADVANCE study: a randomised trial of blood pressure lowering and intensive glucose control in high-risk individuals with type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Hypertens 2001; 19(suppl):S21S28.
  34. Abraira C, Duckworth W, McCarren M, et al. Design of the cooperative study on glycemic control and complications in diabetes mellitus type 2: Veterans Affairs Diabetes Trial. J Diabetes Complications. 2003; 17:314322.
  35. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med. 2007; 356:24572471.
  36. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):168.
  37. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes—2008. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  38. Magee MF, Isley WL. Rationale, design, and methods for glycemic control in the Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes (BARI 2D) Trial. Am J Cardiol 2006; 97:20G30G.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic; Principal Investigator (Cleveland Clinic Site), Member, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) Study Group

Address: Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, A53, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

The author has disclosed that he has received honoraria for consulting, teaching, or speaking from the Abbott, Amylin, Lilly, Merck, and Takeda Pharmaceuticals North America corporations. As of October 20th Dr. Hoogwerf will assume a position in the Diabetes Group at Eli Lilly, US Affiliate (at the time the manuscript was submitted, reviewed, and revised he was a full-time staff endocrinologist at the Cleveland Clinic).

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
729-737
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic; Principal Investigator (Cleveland Clinic Site), Member, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) Study Group

Address: Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, A53, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

The author has disclosed that he has received honoraria for consulting, teaching, or speaking from the Abbott, Amylin, Lilly, Merck, and Takeda Pharmaceuticals North America corporations. As of October 20th Dr. Hoogwerf will assume a position in the Diabetes Group at Eli Lilly, US Affiliate (at the time the manuscript was submitted, reviewed, and revised he was a full-time staff endocrinologist at the Cleveland Clinic).

Author and Disclosure Information

Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD
Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic; Principal Investigator (Cleveland Clinic Site), Member, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) Study Group

Address: Byron J. Hoogwerf, MD, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, A53, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; e-mail [email protected]

The author has disclosed that he has received honoraria for consulting, teaching, or speaking from the Abbott, Amylin, Lilly, Merck, and Takeda Pharmaceuticals North America corporations. As of October 20th Dr. Hoogwerf will assume a position in the Diabetes Group at Eli Lilly, US Affiliate (at the time the manuscript was submitted, reviewed, and revised he was a full-time staff endocrinologist at the Cleveland Clinic).

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles
A clinician and clinical trialist's perspective
A clinician and clinical trialist's perspective

The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial1–5 was designed primarily to address, in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, whether intensive glucose control would result in a lower risk of atherosclerotic disease events or death than would standard treatment.

It was widely expected that intensive treatment would confer either modest benefit or, at worst, no benefit. However, the glucose-lowering arm of the trial was terminated early because of a higher mortality rate in the intensively treated group. (The ACCORD trial has two other arms, which concern blood pressure and lipid-lowering, and these are continuing.)

In earlier trials in type 2 diabetes, concerns had been raised about an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly death associated with glucose-lowering drugs, hypoglycemia itself, or both, and these were well known when ACCORD was convened. ACCORD was very carefully designed and included careful adjudication of each cardiovascular event and death, including whether hypoglycemia might have been a proximate cause of some sudden deaths.5

Therefore, the surprising result of the higher mortality rate with intensive glycemic control in ACCORD will be fodder for discussion in many arenas over the next several years, and it poses some challenges for physicians and patients in determining treatment goals, as well as for organizations that write clinical practice guidelines (and perhaps organizations involved in pay-for-performance based on these guidelines).

Still, I believe that the ACCORD results should not substantially change our approach to treatment goals in type 2 diabetes, although hemoglobin A1c targets below 6% may not have much added value for cardiovascular risk reduction. The low overall mortality rate in all the arms of the ACCORD trial emphasizes the importance of lifestyle modification, lipid and blood pressure therapy, and encouragement of aspirin use in all patients with type 2 diabetes.

This article reflects my views as a practicing diabetologist and clinical trialist (I was an investigator in the ACCORD trial) with a long-standing interest in clinical trials and in how the results influence clinical practice. The views I express herein may not reflect the views of other ACCORD investigators, the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI), the ACCORD trial coordinating center at Wake Forest University, or its data safety and monitoring board.

RISK OF CORONARY DISEASE INCREASES WITH GLUCOSE

Many observational studies6–10 have shown that the risk of cardiovascular disease, especially coronary heart disease, is two to five times higher in people with diabetes mellitus than in people without diabetes. The risk appears to be continuous, so the higher one’s glucose or hemoglobin A1c, the higher the risk.6 This risk even extends to glucose values well below the threshold values currently used to diagnose diabetes mellitus.6 Since there is no glucose threshold for coronary heart disease, the term dysglycemia (rather than hyperglycemia) has been proposed to note the relationship between glucose and coronary heart disease. (The glucose threshold for microvascular complications of diabetes, such as retinopathy and nephropathy, appears to be between 110 and 126 mg/dL).

The clustering of multiple coronary risk factors such as obesity, dyslipidemia, and hypertension has always raised the question of whether glucose is a culprit in coronary risk or whether it simply “runs in bad company.”

EARLIER CLINICAL TRIALS SUGGEST INTENSIVE TREATMENT RAISES RISK

Even though it has been widely believed that intensive glucose-lowering would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes, there have been hints in previous studies that some intensive-treatment regimens might increase risk.

Two large randomized clinical trials and one small one (discussed below) addressed whether glucose control would reduce the risk of atherosclerotic vascular disease events. In each of them, an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly of death was seen in at least one intensively treated group.

In the following discussion, I have calculated all of the death rates as the number of deaths per 1,000 patients per year, based on published study results. In this way, we can compare the rates in the various studies (including ACCORD), regardless of the trial duration.

The university group Diabetes Program: Controvery about tolbutamide therapy

The University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP)11–16 included about 1,000 participants randomized to five treatments: tolbutamide (Orinase, a sulfonylurea), insulin in a fixed dose based on body weight, insulin in adjusted doses based on fasting glucose levels, placebo, and (later) phenformin.

In the 1970s, when the UGDP was carried out, randomized clinical trials were uncommon. Like other trials from that era, the UGDP was underpowered by today’s standards and did not have a data safety and monitoring board.

Rates of cardiovascular events and deaths (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 25 (tolbutamide group)
  • 12 (placebo group).

The two insulin groups did not differ from the placebo group in their rates of cardiovascular events or death.15 The tolbutamide arm was stopped, and the ensuing controversy about how to interpret the trial results lasted for more than a decade. It also resulted in a black-box warning for tolbutamide and all subsequent sulfonylureas.

 

 

United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study: Method of glucose-lowering an issue

The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)17–27 was launched in 1977. A cohort of 5,102 patients (mean age 54 years) with newly diagnosed type 2 diabetes mellitus followed a “prudent diet” for the first 3 to 4 months. Then, if their fasting glucose levels were in the range of 6.1 to 15 mmol/L (110–270 mg/dL), they were randomized to receive various treatments.

Patients who were not obese were randomized to receive either intensive treatment or conventional treatment. The intensive-treatment group received either insulin or a sulfonylurea (chlorpropamide [Diabinese], glibenclamide, or glipizide [Glucotrol]); the conventional-treatment group received diet therapy. The sulfonylurea arm was included partly to address the UGDP results.

Patients who were obese were randomized to receive one of three treatments: intensive treatment (with the agents listed above), conventional treatment, or metformin (Fortamet, Glucophage).

The mean in-trial hemoglobin A1c level in the intensive-treatment group was 7.0%, compared with 7.9% in the conventional-treatment group.

After a mean follow-up of more than 10 years, the incidence of myocardial infarction was 16% lower in the intensive-treatment group, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .052).

Rates of death from all causes among nonobese subjects (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 18.2–20.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 19.9 (conventional-treatment group).

In the obese patients who received metformin, the incidence of myocardial infarction was lower than in the conventional-treatment group but not the intensive-treatment group.

Rates of death among obese patients (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 13.5 (metformin group)
  • 18.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 20.6 (conventional-treatment group).

However, a small subset (n = 587) of the original group assigned to sulfonylurea therapy whose glycemic control deteriorated during the trial were rerandomized to continue to receive a sulfonylurea alone or to have metformin added. There was a statistically significantly higher rate of cardiovascular events and a nonsignificantly higher rate of total mortality in the metformin-plus-sulfonylurea group (30.3 per 1,000 patient-years) than in the sulfonylurea-only group (19.1 per 1,000 patient-years).

These data suggested that the way glucose-lowering was achieved might be as important as the glucose levels actually achieved. However, no definite conclusions could be drawn.

In an editorial on the UKPDS, Nathan26 made a comment that may have been prescient in terms of the ACCORD trial: “Professional organizations will now scramble to decide how to translate the UKPDS results … Whether the UKPDS firmly establishes the choice of any one therapy…or any combination of therapies for the long-term treatment of type 2 diabetes is more questionable.”26

Veterans Administration feasibility study

A Veterans Administration feasibility study28,29 included 153 men (mean age 60) with type 2 diabetes (mean duration 7.8 years) who received either conventional therapy (a single daily dose of insulin) or intensive therapy (multiple doses of insulin plus a sulfonylurea). Over a mean of 27 months, the intensive-therapy group achieved a hemoglobin A1c level that was 2 percentage points lower than in the conventional-therapy group.

At 2.25 years of follow-up, cardiovascular events had occurred in 24 (24%) of the intensive-therapy group and in 16 (20%) of the standard-therapy group (P = .10).

Rates of death from all causes (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 28.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 17.5 (conventional-treatment group).

ACCORD TRIAL DESIGN

ACCORD had a double two-by-two factorial design: all of the more than 10,000 patients were randomly assigned to undergo either intensive or standard glucose-lowering therapy; in addition, approximately half were randomly assigned to receive either aggressive or standard antihypertensive therapy, and the other half were randomly assigned to receive one of two lipid-lowering regimens (Table 1).

The primary outcome measured was the combined incidence of nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes. Secondary outcomes included death from any cause. The study is also evaluating the effect of intensive treatment on microvascular disease, hypoglycemia, cognition, quality of life, and cost-effectiveness.

The ACCORD study was designed to have 89% power to detect a 15% treatment effect of intensive glycemic control compared with standard glycemic control for the primary end point.

ACCORD RESULTS

Participants in ACCORD were between the ages of 40 and 82 at randomization and were generally at high risk of coronary heart disease on the basis of having multiple risk factors or a prior event. Table 2 summarizes their baseline characteristics.3

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 1. Median hemoglobin A1c levels at each study visit in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Bars denote interquartile ranges.
At 1 year, the median hemoglobin A1c value had fallen from 8.1% at baseline to 6.4% in the intensive-treatment group and to 7.5% in the standard-treatment group, and these values remained stable throughout the rest of the trial (Figure 1).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 2. Kaplan-Meier curves for the combined primary outcome (the first occurrence of nonfatal myocardial infarction or nonfatal stroke or death from cardiovascular causes) in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
At a median of 3.4 years, the primary outcome (nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes) had occurred in 6.9% of the intensive-therapy group compared with 7.2% of the standard-therapy group (hazard ratio [HR] 0.90, 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.78–1.04, P = .16) (Figure 2).1 The difference was primarily due to a lower rate of nonfatal myocardial infarction in the intensive-therapy group (n = 186, 3.6%) than in the standard-therapy group (n = 235, 4.6%; HR 0.76, 95% CI 0.62–0.92, P = .004).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 3. Kaplan-Meier curves for death from any cause in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
However, on February 6, 2008, the ACCORD trial announced that 257 (5%) of the patients in the intensive-treatment group had died, compared with 203 (4%) of the standard-treatment group, a 20% difference (P = .04) (Figure 3).1

Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 14 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 11 (standard-treatment group).

Although this difference was relatively small by some standards, it was statistically significant (P = .04).1 The number needed to harm was 333 patients for 1 excess death. The difference was attributable to cardiovascular deaths (Table 3).1

In the analyses available at the time that this study arm closed, the excess mortality was not attributable to any particular treatment regimen. In particular, rosiglitazone (Avandia) use did not contribute to the excess mortality. (Of note, 91.2% of the intensive-treatment group and 57.5% of the conventional-treatment group had been treated with rosiglitazone, with more than 19,000 patient-years of rosiglitazone exposure). The excess mortality was also not attributable to hypoglycemia immediately proximate to the death.

The ACCORD trial’s data safety and monitoring board recommended that this arm of the study be discontinued for safety reasons, and this recommendation was accepted by the NHLBI project office. All participants were notified by letter before the trial results were announced publicly, and all intensive-therapy group participants are now being treated by the protocol used in the standard-therapy group.1

 

 

FEWER DEATHS IN ACCORD THAN IN OTHER STUDIES IN DIABETES

The mortality rates in both arms of ACCORD were much lower than in other observational studies and clinical trials in type 2 diabetes.

The National Health and Nutrition Education Survey (NHANES),30 conducted from 1971 to 1975, included 14,374 people with diabetes between the ages of 25 and 74. Many of them were younger than the ACCORD patients, but two NHANES age-groups overlapped the ACCORD cohort. Rates of death from any cause at 22 years (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 39.7 (ages 45–64)
  • 89.7 (ages 65–74).

The NHANES cohort would not have been treated as vigorously for coronary risk and other common causes of death.

UGDP, UKPDS. Death rates in the glucose-lowering trials of type 2 diabetes mellitus cited above were typically in the range of 20 deaths per 1,000 patient-years but were as high as 30 deaths per 1,000 patient-years in the UGDP tolbutamide group16 and the UK-PDS sulfonylurea-plus-metformin group.20,22,26

Steno-2.31 Half of 160 patients with type 2 diabetes were randomized to intensive strategies for controlling glucose, lipids, and blood pressure and for taking aspirin and angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors and following a healthy lifestyle. The other half received conventional therapy. Even in the intensive-treatment group, the mortality rate at 13 years was higher than in ACCORD. Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient years):

  • 22.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 37.6 (conventional-treatment group).

After the ACCORD results were presented, two other trials addressing the question of whether lower hemoglobin A1c would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes have reported their outcomes:

The ADVANCE trial (Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation),32,33 with 11,140 patients, had a target hemoglobin A1c of 6.5% in an intensive-treatment group and 7.3% in a usual-treatment group. The intensive-treatment group showed no difference in the rates of major macrovascular events (HR 0.94, 95% CI 0.84–1.06, P = .32) or all-cause mortality (HR 0.93, 95% CI 0.83–1.06, P = .32). The overall death rate in ADVANCE (about 18 deaths per 1,000 patient-years) was higher than in ACCORD.

The Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial included 1,791 patients.34 Like the ADVANCE trial, it also found no difference in major cardiovascular outcomes (HR 0.868, P = .11) or cardiovascular mortality rates (HR 1.258, P = .36) with intensive therapy vs conventional therapy, ie, achieved hemoglobin A1c levels of 6.9% vs 8.4% (presented at the American Diabetes Association 2008 Scientific Sessions). Hypoglycemia was associated with an increased risk of death in the standard-treatment group.

An analysis suggested that patients with a shorter duration of diabetes may have had cardiovascular benefit from intensive glucose-lowering, while those who had had it longer may have had increased risk associated with the more intensive therapy. The rate of death from all causes appears to have been higher than in ACCORD, but this could not be determined accurately from the presentations.

Comment. Thus, the ACCORD cohort as a whole has had strikingly lower death rates than in these other studies. The fact that all participants had lower glucose levels on therapy than at baseline may possibly contribute to these lower death rates. In addition, all ACCORD participants in the lipid arm received a statin; all participants in the blood pressure arm had their blood pressure lowered to levels below those commonly seen in clinical practice; participants were encouraged to exercise regularly; most participants were given diet instruction; and other healthy behaviors such as aspirin use, regular follow-up with primary care physicians, and recommendations about smoking were encouraged throughout the study. These comprehensive strategies may represent better care and thus result in lower death rates than in other studies.

POSSIBLE EXPLANATIONS FOR THE ACCORD OUTCOMES

The ACCORD trial has already stimulated fierce debate about the reasons for the higher mortality rate in the intensive-treatment group. With longer follow-up, some new risk factors for death may be identified that are not evident in the analyses of the current 460 deaths. What follows are some of my thoughts, with the caveat that they are not confirmed (supported statistically) by any currently available analyses from ACCORD.

It seems unlikely that lower glucose values as reflected by lower hemoglobin A1c values in the intensive-treatment group are an a priori explanation for the observed differences in mortality rates—especially since the mortality rates were lower than in the NHANES and clinical trial data sets cited above. If we assume that a type 1 statistical error (finding a difference where no difference actually exists) does not explain the findings, then at least four reasonable postulates exist:

Hypoglycemia may have some adverse effect, either acutely or from recurrent events that trigger a catecholamine response with associated risk for arrhythmia or increased coronary heart disease risk. However, the investigators analyzed each death to determine whether hypoglycemia was a contributing cause, and they found no statistically significant relationship between hypoglycemia and death in the intensive-treatment group.

Weight gain is common with intensive therapy. Obesity may be associated with greater cytokine production, higher concentrations of clotting factors, higher levels of free fatty acids, and other potential contributors to the risk of coronary heart disease and death. Currently, the ACCORD analyses do not suggest that weight gain explains the higher death rate.

Medications such as rosiglitazone, sulfonylureas, and the combination of a sulfonylurea plus metformin have been previously associated with increased death rates in some observational and intervention trials. These studies had some serious methodologic limitations (eg, absence of risk adjustment, events not adjudicated, small study cohorts, wide variation in study cohort characteristics) and small numbers of events.11–13,16,26,35 ACCORD analyses have not shown that any single glucose-lowering agent—including rosiglitazone—or combination of agents explains the death rates.

The stress of maintaining glycemic control has been speculated to have in some way contributed to an increased risk. To achieve intensive control, patients had to have frequent contact with their health care providers, they were often told that their hemoglobin A1c values were “too high” even when they were well below those in the American Diabetes Association guidelines, and they had to follow complex glucose-lowering regimens.

Semiquantitative measures of overall attitudes about health exist (eg, the “Feeling Thermometer” scale), but stress was not measured quantitatively in the ACCORD trial.

 

 

IMPLICATIONS OF ACCORD

In practice, most clinicians believe that the target glucose level in patients with type 2 diabetes should be as low as safely possible. This approach does not need to be modified on the basis of current information from ACCORD.

To be safe, regimens should be associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and a low risk of weight gain. Use of combinations of medications that work by different mechanisms is still prudent. Agents should be used that may have favorable effects on other cardiovascular risk factors (eg, lipids, blood pressure, visceral fat).

Hemoglobin A1c targets below 7% are not precluded in all patients on the basis of the ACCORD results, though values lower than 6% may not have much added benefit for cardiovascular risk reduction. We should note that hemoglobin A1c was reduced in all ACCORD participants and that death rates were lower than in many other type 2 diabetic cohorts. Pending data on other outcomes in ACCORD (nephropathy, retinopathy, dementia, fracture risk), I believe it is premature for organizations to change their proposed hemoglobin A1c targets,36,37 as none have proposed values as low as the target in the ACCORD intensive-treatment group. At present, no class of glucose-lowering agents needs to be excluded from consideration on the basis of the ACCORD data.

The overall low rates of death in this population at high risk of coronary heart disease deserve comment. Not only are they lower than in other glucose-lowering trials, but they are also lower than in a number of studies of mortality in diabetes cohorts. As noted above, multiple risk factors for coronary heart disease and death were (and are) addressed in the ACCORD study participants, including repeated recommendation for lifestyle modification, intervention arms with lipid and blood pressure therapy, encouragement of aspirin use, and regular follow-up with health care providers for risk factors not managed by the ACCORD trial protocol. It is likely that multiple approaches to reducing the risk of cardiovascular disease contributed to this low mortality rate and that similar approaches will reduce the risk of coronary disease and death in regular clinical practice.

The ACCORD lipid and blood pressure arms are continuing, with results expected in 2010. The future results from ACCORD as well as from several glucose-lowering trials currently in progress (ADVANCE,32,33 Veteran’s Administration,34 Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes [BARI-2D]38) will likely help refine our understanding of the effects of glucose-lowering, glucose-lowering strategies and targets, and multiple interventions on coronary events and all-cause mortality.

For now, any strategy that lowers glucose and is associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and does not cause excessive weight gain should be considered appropriate in patients with type 2 diabetes.

The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial1–5 was designed primarily to address, in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, whether intensive glucose control would result in a lower risk of atherosclerotic disease events or death than would standard treatment.

It was widely expected that intensive treatment would confer either modest benefit or, at worst, no benefit. However, the glucose-lowering arm of the trial was terminated early because of a higher mortality rate in the intensively treated group. (The ACCORD trial has two other arms, which concern blood pressure and lipid-lowering, and these are continuing.)

In earlier trials in type 2 diabetes, concerns had been raised about an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly death associated with glucose-lowering drugs, hypoglycemia itself, or both, and these were well known when ACCORD was convened. ACCORD was very carefully designed and included careful adjudication of each cardiovascular event and death, including whether hypoglycemia might have been a proximate cause of some sudden deaths.5

Therefore, the surprising result of the higher mortality rate with intensive glycemic control in ACCORD will be fodder for discussion in many arenas over the next several years, and it poses some challenges for physicians and patients in determining treatment goals, as well as for organizations that write clinical practice guidelines (and perhaps organizations involved in pay-for-performance based on these guidelines).

Still, I believe that the ACCORD results should not substantially change our approach to treatment goals in type 2 diabetes, although hemoglobin A1c targets below 6% may not have much added value for cardiovascular risk reduction. The low overall mortality rate in all the arms of the ACCORD trial emphasizes the importance of lifestyle modification, lipid and blood pressure therapy, and encouragement of aspirin use in all patients with type 2 diabetes.

This article reflects my views as a practicing diabetologist and clinical trialist (I was an investigator in the ACCORD trial) with a long-standing interest in clinical trials and in how the results influence clinical practice. The views I express herein may not reflect the views of other ACCORD investigators, the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI), the ACCORD trial coordinating center at Wake Forest University, or its data safety and monitoring board.

RISK OF CORONARY DISEASE INCREASES WITH GLUCOSE

Many observational studies6–10 have shown that the risk of cardiovascular disease, especially coronary heart disease, is two to five times higher in people with diabetes mellitus than in people without diabetes. The risk appears to be continuous, so the higher one’s glucose or hemoglobin A1c, the higher the risk.6 This risk even extends to glucose values well below the threshold values currently used to diagnose diabetes mellitus.6 Since there is no glucose threshold for coronary heart disease, the term dysglycemia (rather than hyperglycemia) has been proposed to note the relationship between glucose and coronary heart disease. (The glucose threshold for microvascular complications of diabetes, such as retinopathy and nephropathy, appears to be between 110 and 126 mg/dL).

The clustering of multiple coronary risk factors such as obesity, dyslipidemia, and hypertension has always raised the question of whether glucose is a culprit in coronary risk or whether it simply “runs in bad company.”

EARLIER CLINICAL TRIALS SUGGEST INTENSIVE TREATMENT RAISES RISK

Even though it has been widely believed that intensive glucose-lowering would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes, there have been hints in previous studies that some intensive-treatment regimens might increase risk.

Two large randomized clinical trials and one small one (discussed below) addressed whether glucose control would reduce the risk of atherosclerotic vascular disease events. In each of them, an increased risk of cardiovascular events and possibly of death was seen in at least one intensively treated group.

In the following discussion, I have calculated all of the death rates as the number of deaths per 1,000 patients per year, based on published study results. In this way, we can compare the rates in the various studies (including ACCORD), regardless of the trial duration.

The university group Diabetes Program: Controvery about tolbutamide therapy

The University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP)11–16 included about 1,000 participants randomized to five treatments: tolbutamide (Orinase, a sulfonylurea), insulin in a fixed dose based on body weight, insulin in adjusted doses based on fasting glucose levels, placebo, and (later) phenformin.

In the 1970s, when the UGDP was carried out, randomized clinical trials were uncommon. Like other trials from that era, the UGDP was underpowered by today’s standards and did not have a data safety and monitoring board.

Rates of cardiovascular events and deaths (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 25 (tolbutamide group)
  • 12 (placebo group).

The two insulin groups did not differ from the placebo group in their rates of cardiovascular events or death.15 The tolbutamide arm was stopped, and the ensuing controversy about how to interpret the trial results lasted for more than a decade. It also resulted in a black-box warning for tolbutamide and all subsequent sulfonylureas.

 

 

United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study: Method of glucose-lowering an issue

The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)17–27 was launched in 1977. A cohort of 5,102 patients (mean age 54 years) with newly diagnosed type 2 diabetes mellitus followed a “prudent diet” for the first 3 to 4 months. Then, if their fasting glucose levels were in the range of 6.1 to 15 mmol/L (110–270 mg/dL), they were randomized to receive various treatments.

Patients who were not obese were randomized to receive either intensive treatment or conventional treatment. The intensive-treatment group received either insulin or a sulfonylurea (chlorpropamide [Diabinese], glibenclamide, or glipizide [Glucotrol]); the conventional-treatment group received diet therapy. The sulfonylurea arm was included partly to address the UGDP results.

Patients who were obese were randomized to receive one of three treatments: intensive treatment (with the agents listed above), conventional treatment, or metformin (Fortamet, Glucophage).

The mean in-trial hemoglobin A1c level in the intensive-treatment group was 7.0%, compared with 7.9% in the conventional-treatment group.

After a mean follow-up of more than 10 years, the incidence of myocardial infarction was 16% lower in the intensive-treatment group, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .052).

Rates of death from all causes among nonobese subjects (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 18.2–20.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 19.9 (conventional-treatment group).

In the obese patients who received metformin, the incidence of myocardial infarction was lower than in the conventional-treatment group but not the intensive-treatment group.

Rates of death among obese patients (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 13.5 (metformin group)
  • 18.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 20.6 (conventional-treatment group).

However, a small subset (n = 587) of the original group assigned to sulfonylurea therapy whose glycemic control deteriorated during the trial were rerandomized to continue to receive a sulfonylurea alone or to have metformin added. There was a statistically significantly higher rate of cardiovascular events and a nonsignificantly higher rate of total mortality in the metformin-plus-sulfonylurea group (30.3 per 1,000 patient-years) than in the sulfonylurea-only group (19.1 per 1,000 patient-years).

These data suggested that the way glucose-lowering was achieved might be as important as the glucose levels actually achieved. However, no definite conclusions could be drawn.

In an editorial on the UKPDS, Nathan26 made a comment that may have been prescient in terms of the ACCORD trial: “Professional organizations will now scramble to decide how to translate the UKPDS results … Whether the UKPDS firmly establishes the choice of any one therapy…or any combination of therapies for the long-term treatment of type 2 diabetes is more questionable.”26

Veterans Administration feasibility study

A Veterans Administration feasibility study28,29 included 153 men (mean age 60) with type 2 diabetes (mean duration 7.8 years) who received either conventional therapy (a single daily dose of insulin) or intensive therapy (multiple doses of insulin plus a sulfonylurea). Over a mean of 27 months, the intensive-therapy group achieved a hemoglobin A1c level that was 2 percentage points lower than in the conventional-therapy group.

At 2.25 years of follow-up, cardiovascular events had occurred in 24 (24%) of the intensive-therapy group and in 16 (20%) of the standard-therapy group (P = .10).

Rates of death from all causes (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 28.9 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 17.5 (conventional-treatment group).

ACCORD TRIAL DESIGN

ACCORD had a double two-by-two factorial design: all of the more than 10,000 patients were randomly assigned to undergo either intensive or standard glucose-lowering therapy; in addition, approximately half were randomly assigned to receive either aggressive or standard antihypertensive therapy, and the other half were randomly assigned to receive one of two lipid-lowering regimens (Table 1).

The primary outcome measured was the combined incidence of nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes. Secondary outcomes included death from any cause. The study is also evaluating the effect of intensive treatment on microvascular disease, hypoglycemia, cognition, quality of life, and cost-effectiveness.

The ACCORD study was designed to have 89% power to detect a 15% treatment effect of intensive glycemic control compared with standard glycemic control for the primary end point.

ACCORD RESULTS

Participants in ACCORD were between the ages of 40 and 82 at randomization and were generally at high risk of coronary heart disease on the basis of having multiple risk factors or a prior event. Table 2 summarizes their baseline characteristics.3

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 1. Median hemoglobin A1c levels at each study visit in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Bars denote interquartile ranges.
At 1 year, the median hemoglobin A1c value had fallen from 8.1% at baseline to 6.4% in the intensive-treatment group and to 7.5% in the standard-treatment group, and these values remained stable throughout the rest of the trial (Figure 1).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545-2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 2. Kaplan-Meier curves for the combined primary outcome (the first occurrence of nonfatal myocardial infarction or nonfatal stroke or death from cardiovascular causes) in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
At a median of 3.4 years, the primary outcome (nonfatal myocardial infarction, nonfatal stroke, or death from cardiovascular causes) had occurred in 6.9% of the intensive-therapy group compared with 7.2% of the standard-therapy group (hazard ratio [HR] 0.90, 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.78–1.04, P = .16) (Figure 2).1 The difference was primarily due to a lower rate of nonfatal myocardial infarction in the intensive-therapy group (n = 186, 3.6%) than in the standard-therapy group (n = 235, 4.6%; HR 0.76, 95% CI 0.62–0.92, P = .004).1

From Gerstein HC, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559. Copyright 2008, Massachusetts Medical Society. All rights reserved.
Figure 3. Kaplan-Meier curves for death from any cause in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial.
However, on February 6, 2008, the ACCORD trial announced that 257 (5%) of the patients in the intensive-treatment group had died, compared with 203 (4%) of the standard-treatment group, a 20% difference (P = .04) (Figure 3).1

Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 14 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 11 (standard-treatment group).

Although this difference was relatively small by some standards, it was statistically significant (P = .04).1 The number needed to harm was 333 patients for 1 excess death. The difference was attributable to cardiovascular deaths (Table 3).1

In the analyses available at the time that this study arm closed, the excess mortality was not attributable to any particular treatment regimen. In particular, rosiglitazone (Avandia) use did not contribute to the excess mortality. (Of note, 91.2% of the intensive-treatment group and 57.5% of the conventional-treatment group had been treated with rosiglitazone, with more than 19,000 patient-years of rosiglitazone exposure). The excess mortality was also not attributable to hypoglycemia immediately proximate to the death.

The ACCORD trial’s data safety and monitoring board recommended that this arm of the study be discontinued for safety reasons, and this recommendation was accepted by the NHLBI project office. All participants were notified by letter before the trial results were announced publicly, and all intensive-therapy group participants are now being treated by the protocol used in the standard-therapy group.1

 

 

FEWER DEATHS IN ACCORD THAN IN OTHER STUDIES IN DIABETES

The mortality rates in both arms of ACCORD were much lower than in other observational studies and clinical trials in type 2 diabetes.

The National Health and Nutrition Education Survey (NHANES),30 conducted from 1971 to 1975, included 14,374 people with diabetes between the ages of 25 and 74. Many of them were younger than the ACCORD patients, but two NHANES age-groups overlapped the ACCORD cohort. Rates of death from any cause at 22 years (per 1,000 patient-years):

  • 39.7 (ages 45–64)
  • 89.7 (ages 65–74).

The NHANES cohort would not have been treated as vigorously for coronary risk and other common causes of death.

UGDP, UKPDS. Death rates in the glucose-lowering trials of type 2 diabetes mellitus cited above were typically in the range of 20 deaths per 1,000 patient-years but were as high as 30 deaths per 1,000 patient-years in the UGDP tolbutamide group16 and the UK-PDS sulfonylurea-plus-metformin group.20,22,26

Steno-2.31 Half of 160 patients with type 2 diabetes were randomized to intensive strategies for controlling glucose, lipids, and blood pressure and for taking aspirin and angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors and following a healthy lifestyle. The other half received conventional therapy. Even in the intensive-treatment group, the mortality rate at 13 years was higher than in ACCORD. Rates of death from any cause (per 1,000 patient years):

  • 22.5 (intensive-treatment group)
  • 37.6 (conventional-treatment group).

After the ACCORD results were presented, two other trials addressing the question of whether lower hemoglobin A1c would reduce cardiovascular risk in type 2 diabetes have reported their outcomes:

The ADVANCE trial (Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation),32,33 with 11,140 patients, had a target hemoglobin A1c of 6.5% in an intensive-treatment group and 7.3% in a usual-treatment group. The intensive-treatment group showed no difference in the rates of major macrovascular events (HR 0.94, 95% CI 0.84–1.06, P = .32) or all-cause mortality (HR 0.93, 95% CI 0.83–1.06, P = .32). The overall death rate in ADVANCE (about 18 deaths per 1,000 patient-years) was higher than in ACCORD.

The Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial included 1,791 patients.34 Like the ADVANCE trial, it also found no difference in major cardiovascular outcomes (HR 0.868, P = .11) or cardiovascular mortality rates (HR 1.258, P = .36) with intensive therapy vs conventional therapy, ie, achieved hemoglobin A1c levels of 6.9% vs 8.4% (presented at the American Diabetes Association 2008 Scientific Sessions). Hypoglycemia was associated with an increased risk of death in the standard-treatment group.

An analysis suggested that patients with a shorter duration of diabetes may have had cardiovascular benefit from intensive glucose-lowering, while those who had had it longer may have had increased risk associated with the more intensive therapy. The rate of death from all causes appears to have been higher than in ACCORD, but this could not be determined accurately from the presentations.

Comment. Thus, the ACCORD cohort as a whole has had strikingly lower death rates than in these other studies. The fact that all participants had lower glucose levels on therapy than at baseline may possibly contribute to these lower death rates. In addition, all ACCORD participants in the lipid arm received a statin; all participants in the blood pressure arm had their blood pressure lowered to levels below those commonly seen in clinical practice; participants were encouraged to exercise regularly; most participants were given diet instruction; and other healthy behaviors such as aspirin use, regular follow-up with primary care physicians, and recommendations about smoking were encouraged throughout the study. These comprehensive strategies may represent better care and thus result in lower death rates than in other studies.

POSSIBLE EXPLANATIONS FOR THE ACCORD OUTCOMES

The ACCORD trial has already stimulated fierce debate about the reasons for the higher mortality rate in the intensive-treatment group. With longer follow-up, some new risk factors for death may be identified that are not evident in the analyses of the current 460 deaths. What follows are some of my thoughts, with the caveat that they are not confirmed (supported statistically) by any currently available analyses from ACCORD.

It seems unlikely that lower glucose values as reflected by lower hemoglobin A1c values in the intensive-treatment group are an a priori explanation for the observed differences in mortality rates—especially since the mortality rates were lower than in the NHANES and clinical trial data sets cited above. If we assume that a type 1 statistical error (finding a difference where no difference actually exists) does not explain the findings, then at least four reasonable postulates exist:

Hypoglycemia may have some adverse effect, either acutely or from recurrent events that trigger a catecholamine response with associated risk for arrhythmia or increased coronary heart disease risk. However, the investigators analyzed each death to determine whether hypoglycemia was a contributing cause, and they found no statistically significant relationship between hypoglycemia and death in the intensive-treatment group.

Weight gain is common with intensive therapy. Obesity may be associated with greater cytokine production, higher concentrations of clotting factors, higher levels of free fatty acids, and other potential contributors to the risk of coronary heart disease and death. Currently, the ACCORD analyses do not suggest that weight gain explains the higher death rate.

Medications such as rosiglitazone, sulfonylureas, and the combination of a sulfonylurea plus metformin have been previously associated with increased death rates in some observational and intervention trials. These studies had some serious methodologic limitations (eg, absence of risk adjustment, events not adjudicated, small study cohorts, wide variation in study cohort characteristics) and small numbers of events.11–13,16,26,35 ACCORD analyses have not shown that any single glucose-lowering agent—including rosiglitazone—or combination of agents explains the death rates.

The stress of maintaining glycemic control has been speculated to have in some way contributed to an increased risk. To achieve intensive control, patients had to have frequent contact with their health care providers, they were often told that their hemoglobin A1c values were “too high” even when they were well below those in the American Diabetes Association guidelines, and they had to follow complex glucose-lowering regimens.

Semiquantitative measures of overall attitudes about health exist (eg, the “Feeling Thermometer” scale), but stress was not measured quantitatively in the ACCORD trial.

 

 

IMPLICATIONS OF ACCORD

In practice, most clinicians believe that the target glucose level in patients with type 2 diabetes should be as low as safely possible. This approach does not need to be modified on the basis of current information from ACCORD.

To be safe, regimens should be associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and a low risk of weight gain. Use of combinations of medications that work by different mechanisms is still prudent. Agents should be used that may have favorable effects on other cardiovascular risk factors (eg, lipids, blood pressure, visceral fat).

Hemoglobin A1c targets below 7% are not precluded in all patients on the basis of the ACCORD results, though values lower than 6% may not have much added benefit for cardiovascular risk reduction. We should note that hemoglobin A1c was reduced in all ACCORD participants and that death rates were lower than in many other type 2 diabetic cohorts. Pending data on other outcomes in ACCORD (nephropathy, retinopathy, dementia, fracture risk), I believe it is premature for organizations to change their proposed hemoglobin A1c targets,36,37 as none have proposed values as low as the target in the ACCORD intensive-treatment group. At present, no class of glucose-lowering agents needs to be excluded from consideration on the basis of the ACCORD data.

The overall low rates of death in this population at high risk of coronary heart disease deserve comment. Not only are they lower than in other glucose-lowering trials, but they are also lower than in a number of studies of mortality in diabetes cohorts. As noted above, multiple risk factors for coronary heart disease and death were (and are) addressed in the ACCORD study participants, including repeated recommendation for lifestyle modification, intervention arms with lipid and blood pressure therapy, encouragement of aspirin use, and regular follow-up with health care providers for risk factors not managed by the ACCORD trial protocol. It is likely that multiple approaches to reducing the risk of cardiovascular disease contributed to this low mortality rate and that similar approaches will reduce the risk of coronary disease and death in regular clinical practice.

The ACCORD lipid and blood pressure arms are continuing, with results expected in 2010. The future results from ACCORD as well as from several glucose-lowering trials currently in progress (ADVANCE,32,33 Veteran’s Administration,34 Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes [BARI-2D]38) will likely help refine our understanding of the effects of glucose-lowering, glucose-lowering strategies and targets, and multiple interventions on coronary events and all-cause mortality.

For now, any strategy that lowers glucose and is associated with a low risk of hypoglycemia and does not cause excessive weight gain should be considered appropriate in patients with type 2 diabetes.

References
  1. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  2. Goff DC, Gerstein HC, Ginsberg HN, et al. Prevention of cardiovascular disease in persons with type 2 diabetes mellitus: current knowledge and rationale for the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:4i20i.
  3. Buse JB, Bigger JT, Byington RP, et al. Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial: design and methods. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:21i33i.
  4. Gerstein HC, Riddle MC, Kendall DM, et al. Glycemia treatment strategies in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:34i43i.
  5. Bonds DE, Kurashige EM, Bergenstal R, et al. Severe hypoglycemia monitoring and risk management procedures in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:80i89i.
  6. Gerstein HC. Dysglycemia, not just diabetes, is a continuous risk factor for cardiovascular disease. Evid Based Cardiovasc Med. 1997; 1:8788.
  7. Gerstein HC, Pais P, Pogue J, Yusuf S. Relationship of glucose and insulin levels to the risk of myocardial infarction: a case-control study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 1999; 33:612619.
  8. Gerstein HC, Capes SE. Dysglycemia: a key cardiovascular risk factor. Semin Vasc Med. 2002; 2:165174.
  9. Gerstein HC, Santaguida P, Raina P, et al. Annual incidence and relative risk of diabetes in people with various categories of dysglycemia: a systematic overview and meta-analysis of prospective studies. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2007; 78:305312.
  10. American Diabetes Association. Role of cardiovascular risk factors in prevention and treatment of macrovascular disease in diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1989; 12:573579.
  11. Schor S. The University Group Diabetes Program. A statistician looks at the mortality results. JAMA. 1971; 217:16711675.
  12. Cornfield JThe University Group Diabetes Program. A further statistical analysis of the mortality findings. JAMA. 1971; 217:16761687.
  13. Feinstein AR. Clinical biostatistics. 8. An analytic appraisal of the University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP) study. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1971; 12:167191.
  14. The University Group Diabetes Program. A study of the effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. V. Evaluation of pheniformin therapy. Diabetes 1975; 24( suppl 1):65184.
  15. Knatterud GL, Klimt CR, Levin ME, Jacobson ME, Goldner MG. Effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. VII. Mortality and selected nonfatal events with insulin treatment. JAMA. 1978; 240:3742.
  16. Schwartz TB, Meinert CL. The UGDP controversy: thirty-four years of contentious ambiguity laid to rest. Perspect Biol Med. 2004; 47:564574.
  17. Turner RC, Holman RR. Lessons from UK Prospective Diabetes Study. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 1995; 28( suppl):S151S157.
  18. UKPDS Research Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:854865.
  19. UKPDS Study Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:837853.
  20. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UKPDS 28: a randomized trial of efficacy of early addition of metformin in sulfonylurea-treated type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:8792.
  21. Bretzel RG, Voigt K, Schatz H. The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) implications for the pharmacotherapy of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Exp Clin Endocrinol Diabetes. 1998; 106:369372.
  22. Turner RC, Cull CA, Frighi V, Holman RR. Glycemic control with diet, sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: progressive requirement for multiple therapies (UKPDS 49). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. JAMA. 1999; 281:20052012.
  23. Leslie RD. United Kingdom prospective diabetes study (UKPDS): what now or so what? Diabetes Metab Res Rev 1999; 15:6571.
  24. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ. 2000; 321:405412.
  25. Mooradian AD, Chehade J. Implications of the UK Prospective Diabetes Study: questions answered and issues remaining. Drugs Aging. 2000; 16:159164.
  26. Nathan DM. Some answers, more controversy, from UKPDS. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study. Lancet. 1998; 352:832833.
  27. Srimanunthiphol J, Beddow R, Arakaki R. A review of the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) and a discussion of the implications for patient care. Hawaii Med J. 2000; 59:295298.
  28. Duckworth WC, McCarren M, Abraira C. Glucose control and cardiovascular complications: the VA Diabetes Trial. Diabetes Care. 2001; 24:942945.
  29. Abraira C, Colwell JA, Nuttall FQ, et al. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study on glycemic control and complications in type II diabetes (VA CSDM). Results of the feasibility trial. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study in Type II Diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1995; 18:11131123.
  30. Gu K, Cowie CC, Harris MI. Mortality in adults with and without diabetes in a national cohort of the U.S. population, 1971–1993. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:11381145. NHANES
  31. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:580591.
  32. Patel A, MacMahon S, Chalmers J, et al. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25602572.
  33. Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: PreterAx and DiamicroN Modified-Release Controlled Evaluation. Rationale and design of the ADVANCE study: a randomised trial of blood pressure lowering and intensive glucose control in high-risk individuals with type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Hypertens 2001; 19(suppl):S21S28.
  34. Abraira C, Duckworth W, McCarren M, et al. Design of the cooperative study on glycemic control and complications in diabetes mellitus type 2: Veterans Affairs Diabetes Trial. J Diabetes Complications. 2003; 17:314322.
  35. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med. 2007; 356:24572471.
  36. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):168.
  37. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes—2008. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  38. Magee MF, Isley WL. Rationale, design, and methods for glycemic control in the Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes (BARI 2D) Trial. Am J Cardiol 2006; 97:20G30G.
References
  1. Gerstein HC, Miller ME, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25452559.
  2. Goff DC, Gerstein HC, Ginsberg HN, et al. Prevention of cardiovascular disease in persons with type 2 diabetes mellitus: current knowledge and rationale for the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:4i20i.
  3. Buse JB, Bigger JT, Byington RP, et al. Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial: design and methods. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:21i33i.
  4. Gerstein HC, Riddle MC, Kendall DM, et al. Glycemia treatment strategies in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:34i43i.
  5. Bonds DE, Kurashige EM, Bergenstal R, et al. Severe hypoglycemia monitoring and risk management procedures in the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) trial. Am J Cardiol 2007; 99:80i89i.
  6. Gerstein HC. Dysglycemia, not just diabetes, is a continuous risk factor for cardiovascular disease. Evid Based Cardiovasc Med. 1997; 1:8788.
  7. Gerstein HC, Pais P, Pogue J, Yusuf S. Relationship of glucose and insulin levels to the risk of myocardial infarction: a case-control study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 1999; 33:612619.
  8. Gerstein HC, Capes SE. Dysglycemia: a key cardiovascular risk factor. Semin Vasc Med. 2002; 2:165174.
  9. Gerstein HC, Santaguida P, Raina P, et al. Annual incidence and relative risk of diabetes in people with various categories of dysglycemia: a systematic overview and meta-analysis of prospective studies. Diabetes Res Clin Pract. 2007; 78:305312.
  10. American Diabetes Association. Role of cardiovascular risk factors in prevention and treatment of macrovascular disease in diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1989; 12:573579.
  11. Schor S. The University Group Diabetes Program. A statistician looks at the mortality results. JAMA. 1971; 217:16711675.
  12. Cornfield JThe University Group Diabetes Program. A further statistical analysis of the mortality findings. JAMA. 1971; 217:16761687.
  13. Feinstein AR. Clinical biostatistics. 8. An analytic appraisal of the University Group Diabetes Program (UGDP) study. Clin Pharmacol Ther. 1971; 12:167191.
  14. The University Group Diabetes Program. A study of the effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. V. Evaluation of pheniformin therapy. Diabetes 1975; 24( suppl 1):65184.
  15. Knatterud GL, Klimt CR, Levin ME, Jacobson ME, Goldner MG. Effects of hypoglycemic agents on vascular complications in patients with adult-onset diabetes. VII. Mortality and selected nonfatal events with insulin treatment. JAMA. 1978; 240:3742.
  16. Schwartz TB, Meinert CL. The UGDP controversy: thirty-four years of contentious ambiguity laid to rest. Perspect Biol Med. 2004; 47:564574.
  17. Turner RC, Holman RR. Lessons from UK Prospective Diabetes Study. Diabetes Res Clin Pract 1995; 28( suppl):S151S157.
  18. UKPDS Research Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:854865.
  19. UKPDS Study Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Lancet. 1998; 352:837853.
  20. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UKPDS 28: a randomized trial of efficacy of early addition of metformin in sulfonylurea-treated type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:8792.
  21. Bretzel RG, Voigt K, Schatz H. The United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) implications for the pharmacotherapy of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Exp Clin Endocrinol Diabetes. 1998; 106:369372.
  22. Turner RC, Cull CA, Frighi V, Holman RR. Glycemic control with diet, sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus: progressive requirement for multiple therapies (UKPDS 49). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. JAMA. 1999; 281:20052012.
  23. Leslie RD. United Kingdom prospective diabetes study (UKPDS): what now or so what? Diabetes Metab Res Rev 1999; 15:6571.
  24. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ. 2000; 321:405412.
  25. Mooradian AD, Chehade J. Implications of the UK Prospective Diabetes Study: questions answered and issues remaining. Drugs Aging. 2000; 16:159164.
  26. Nathan DM. Some answers, more controversy, from UKPDS. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study. Lancet. 1998; 352:832833.
  27. Srimanunthiphol J, Beddow R, Arakaki R. A review of the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) and a discussion of the implications for patient care. Hawaii Med J. 2000; 59:295298.
  28. Duckworth WC, McCarren M, Abraira C. Glucose control and cardiovascular complications: the VA Diabetes Trial. Diabetes Care. 2001; 24:942945.
  29. Abraira C, Colwell JA, Nuttall FQ, et al. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study on glycemic control and complications in type II diabetes (VA CSDM). Results of the feasibility trial. Veterans Affairs Cooperative Study in Type II Diabetes. Diabetes Care. 1995; 18:11131123.
  30. Gu K, Cowie CC, Harris MI. Mortality in adults with and without diabetes in a national cohort of the U.S. population, 1971–1993. Diabetes Care. 1998; 21:11381145. NHANES
  31. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:580591.
  32. Patel A, MacMahon S, Chalmers J, et al. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med. 2008; 358:25602572.
  33. Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: PreterAx and DiamicroN Modified-Release Controlled Evaluation. Rationale and design of the ADVANCE study: a randomised trial of blood pressure lowering and intensive glucose control in high-risk individuals with type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Hypertens 2001; 19(suppl):S21S28.
  34. Abraira C, Duckworth W, McCarren M, et al. Design of the cooperative study on glycemic control and complications in diabetes mellitus type 2: Veterans Affairs Diabetes Trial. J Diabetes Complications. 2003; 17:314322.
  35. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med. 2007; 356:24572471.
  36. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):168.
  37. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes—2008. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  38. Magee MF, Isley WL. Rationale, design, and methods for glycemic control in the Bypass Angioplasty Revascularization Investigation 2 Diabetes (BARI 2D) Trial. Am J Cardiol 2006; 97:20G30G.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 75(10)
Page Number
729-737
Page Number
729-737
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD
Display Headline
Does intensive therapy of type 2 diabetes help or harm? Seeking accord on ACCORD
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • No obvious cause, including hypoglycemia proximate to death or the use of any particular medication, clearly explained the excess deaths, although hypoglycemia occurred more often in intensively treated participants.
  • The death rates in ACCORD were lower than in population studies and in other intervention trials. It is likely that multiple approaches to reducing the risk of cardiovascular disease contributed to this low mortality rate.
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica
Article PDF Media

What's Eating You? Extensive Cutaneous Larva Migrans (Ancylostoma braziliense)

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/10/2019 - 12:15
Display Headline
What's Eating You? Extensive Cutaneous Larva Migrans (Ancylostoma braziliense)

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Patel S, Aboutalebi S, Vindhya PL, Smith J

Issue
Cutis - 82(4)
Publications
Page Number
239-240
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Patel S, Aboutalebi S, Vindhya PL, Smith J

Author and Disclosure Information

Patel S, Aboutalebi S, Vindhya PL, Smith J

Article PDF
Article PDF

Issue
Cutis - 82(4)
Issue
Cutis - 82(4)
Page Number
239-240
Page Number
239-240
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
What's Eating You? Extensive Cutaneous Larva Migrans (Ancylostoma braziliense)
Display Headline
What's Eating You? Extensive Cutaneous Larva Migrans (Ancylostoma braziliense)
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

How to reach LDL targets quickly in patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 16:04
Display Headline
How to reach LDL targets quickly in patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome

 

Practice recommendations

 

  • You can reduce elevated LDL-C levels in more patients with diabetes and metabolic syndrome using this study's algorithm.
  • Choose a starting dose of a statin according to the gap between baseline and target LDL-C values.
  • Using a tailored starting dose of atorvastatin, most patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome can achieve LDL-C target levels safely within 6 to 12 weeks, without raising the initial dose or with a single titration step.

 

Abstract

Purpose To investigate whether using an algorithm to select the starting dose of a statin according to baseline and target LDL-cholesterol (LDL-C) values would facilitate achieving lipid targets in patients with diabetes or the metabolic syndrome.

Methods Two 12-week, prospective, open-label trials enrolled 2717 high-risk subjects, of whom 1024 had diabetes and 1251 had metabolic syndrome. Subjects with LDL-C between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) were assigned a starting dose of atorvastatin (10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d) based on LDL-C level and status of statin use at baseline (statin-free [SF] or statin-treated [ST]), with a single uptitration at 6 weeks, if required.

Results Among patients with diabetes, 81% of SF subjects (82%, 84%, 82%, and 76% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 60% of ST subjects (61%, 68%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among patients with metabolic syndrome, 78% of SF subjects (81%, 84%, 82%, and 66% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 57% of ST subjects (58%, 70%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among ST subjects, we observed reductions in LDL-C with atorvastatin beyond those achieved with other statins used at baseline in patients with diabetes and patients with metabolic syndrome. Atorvastatin was well tolerated.

Conclusions The ACTFAST studies confirm that a targeted starting dose of atorvastatin allows most patients with type 2 diabetes or the metabolic syndrome to achieve their LDL-C target safely with the initial dose or just a single titration. This therapeutic strategy may help overcome the treatment gap still observed in the treatment of lipids in diabetes.

How many of your patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome have a low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level below the target of 100 mg/dL? Your answer, undoubtedly, is not enough of them. The good news we report in this article is that you can safely achieve the target more often, within 6 to 12 weeks, using a simple algorithm that helps you determine the optimal starting dose of a statin.

Good reason for concern. Individuals with coronary heart disease (CHD) or CHD risk equivalents such as diabetes have the highest cardiovascular risk and, according to the National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) III and other guidelines, must aim for the lowest target levels of LDL-C.1 As the number of cardiovascular risk factors increases in a population, the percentage of patients reaching targets decreases2,3 —to as low as 37% among those at highest risk.2 The international Analysis and Understanding of Diabetes and Dyslipidaemia: Improving Treatment (AUDIT) survey found that out of all patients with type 2 diabetes being treated, only 54% achieved target.4

Type 2 diabetes purportedly imparts a cardiovascular risk comparable to that of a prior cardiovascular event.1,5-7 Moreover, the outcome of such events in patients with diabetes is worse than in patients without diabetes, with approximately 7 out of 10 patients dying from the event or its complications.7-9

 

The metabolic syndrome (MetSyn) also increases risk of cardiovascular events and mortality, even in individuals without diabetes or CHD.10-13 In 1 study, the risks of all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in patients with MetSyn were 1.38 to 1.44 and 2.26 to 2.78, respectively, compared with those who did not have MetSyn.12

The algorithm we describe in this article was developed from results of the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) trials. These trials were designed to assess whether, according to the degree of reduction required in LDL-C, an optimal starting dose of atorvastatin could be identified so that patients would achieve LDL-C targets quickly, with no change in the dose or with just one titration step, and regardless of statin use at baseline.

The main results of ACTFAST 1 and 2 have been published elsewhere.14,15 We report specifically on a prespecified analysis of pooled results in the subset of patients with diabetes or MetSyn.

 

 

Methods

Patient population

We extracted the study population from prespecified pooling of data from ACTFAST 1 and 2,14,15 which were 12-week, multicenter, prospective, open-label trials that used the same protocol. A full description of inclusion and exclusion criteria for ACTFAST has been published elsewhere.14,15

Briefly, subjects were either statin-free or statin-treated at baseline, had CHD or a CHD equivalent, had an LDL-C level between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) and triglycerides =600 mg/dL (6.8 mmol/L), and were willing to follow a recommended diet.

We excluded patients if they had used other lipid-lowering therapy in the prior 2 months (except for statins in the statin-treated study arm) or if they were receiving >40 mg/d of any statin. Patients taking atorvastatin at screening were excluded because the study's goal was to assess the benefits of switching over to a flexible starting dose of atorvastatin. We defined diabetes and MetSyn according to the American Diabetes Association criteria16 and the NCEP 2001 criteria,1 respectively.

Doses reflected LDL-C baseline-target gap and prior statin use

If patients were statin free at baseline, we assigned them to 6 weeks of treatment with atorvastatin, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d, according to their baseline LDL-C level ( FIGURE 1 ). For patients who had been taking a statin at screening, starting doses of atorvastatin for each LDL-C increment were doubled.

If patients did not reach LDL-C targets at the end of 6 weeks, we titrated their regimen to the next higher dose for an additional 6 weeks. Patients initially allocated to receive atorvastatin at 80 mg who did not reach LDL-C targets continued at that dose, and we added a more intense therapeutic lifestyle intervention (NCEP II step 2 diet).1

We obtained blood samples at baseline screening, week 6, and week 12, to measure 12-hour fasting serum lipid profiles and to make routine safety assessments (hematology and chemistry). Patients received dietary counseling at all visits.

The ACTFAST protocol and amendments were approved by appropriately constituted central or local institutional review boards, and all patients gave written informed consent.

 

FIGURE 1
How treatment doses were determined

Statin-free patients received a specified dose of atorvastatin according to their baseline low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level. Patients who had been treated with another statin at screening received atorvastatin at a dose double that given to statin-free patients with equivalent LDL-C levels, for a maximum dose of 80 mg.



Reprinted from Atherosclerosis, vol. 191, Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al, Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study, 135-146, © 2006, with permission from Elsevier.

Primary efficacy outcome: LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL

The primary efficacy outcome was the proportion of patients with either diabetes or MetSyn achieving NCEP Adult Treatment Panel-III target LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL (<2.6 mmol/L) after 12 weeks of treatment.1 Secondary efficacy parameters were described in ACTFAST 1.14

We analyzed data according to intention-to-treat (ITT), using the last observation carried forward (LOCF) for missing data. The ITT population consisted of all patients who took at least 1 dose of study medication, and had at least 1 subsequent assessment.

Results

Between January 2003 and February 2004, 3634 subjects were screened for ACTFAST 1 and 2, and 2717 patients were enrolled from 12 countries (Canada, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Slovakia, Spain, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom). Ethnicity was recorded for about 80% of patients; more than 90% were Caucasian.

Diabetes

The ITT population included 1024 patients with diabetes, of whom 97% had type 2 diabetes and 73% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are available online, in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 81% (95% confidence interval [CI], 77.8%-83.5%) of statin-free and 60% (95% CI, 53.9%-65.4%) of statin-treated patients with diabetes achieved LDLC target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). In contrast, among patients without diabetes (n=1693), 77% (95% CI, 73.9%-79.3%) of statin-free and 59% (95% CI, 55.4%-62.5%) of statin-treated patients achieved target.

For diabetes patients, mean percent reductions in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C and apolipoprotein B (apo B) were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated subjects ( TABLE 2 ). Significant increases in HDL-C were seen only with the 10- and 80-mg doses in statin-free patients.

 

 

 

FIGURE 2
Patients who achieved an LDL-C level of <100 mg/dL
after receiving 12 weeks of atorvastatin

TABLE 1
Demographic profiles of patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Men, n (%)410 (55.1)161 (57.5)571 (55.8)
Age, years60.9±10.962.2±10.161.3±10.7
Weight, kg85.0±18.083.3±16.084.6±17.5
Waist circumference, cm103.3±13.8102.3±13.0103.0±13.6
Smokers, %16.512.515.4
Type 2 diabetes, % (% treated with insulin)96.8 (16.3)96.8 (16.6)96.8 (16.3)
Blood pressure, mm Hg137.1±15.7/79.6±9.6136.3±16.4/77.5±10.5136.9±15.9/79.0±9.9
CHD, %24.256.433.0
PVD, %5.57.96.2
CVD, %6.99.37.5
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Men, n (%)483 (57.6)248 (60.2)731 (58.4)
Age, years62.0±10.262.7±10.162.2±10.2
Weight, kg87.4±17.285.7±15.186.9±16.6
Waist circumference, cm106.2±12.3104.8±12.6105.7±12.4
Smokers, %23.019.721.9
Diabetes, % (% type 2 diabetes) (% treated with insulin)60.4 (98.6) (15.6)46.1 (98.9) (17.6)55.7 (98.7) (16.1)
Blood pressure, mm Hg140.1±14.8/81.4±9.3139.7±14.6/79.4±10.0140.0±14.7/80.7±9.6
CHD, %41.875.552.9
PVD, %6.49.07.3
CVD, %9.810.09.8
Mean±standard deviation for continuous variables.
CHD, coronary heart disease; PVD, peripheral vascular disease; CVD, cerebrovascular disease.

TABLE 2
Mean percent change (95% CI) in lipid levels from baseline when patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome took atorvastatin
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=395)20 MG (N=98)40 MG (N=90)80 MG (N=161)20 MG (N=216)40 MG (N=28)80 MG (N=36)
Total cholesterol*-23.0 (-24.3 to -21.7)-31.6 (-33.8 to -29.3)-38.1 (-40.5 to -35.7)-41.2 (-43.3 to -39.1)-16.9 (-18.6 to -15.2)-30.4 (-36.0 to -24.9)-34.2 (-39.4 to -30.0)
LDL-C*-33.9 (-35.6 to -32.2)-43.4 (-46.0 to -40.7)-51.0 (-54.1 to -48.0)-53.0 (-55.6 to -50.4)-23.9 (-26.3 to -21.6)-40.3 (-47.2 to -33.5)-42.1 (-50.2 to -33.9)
HDL-C2.9 (1.4 to 4.3)0.4 (-2.1 to 2.9)-0.7 (-3.9 to 2.6)-2.8 (-4.9 to -0.6)-0.8 (-2.6 to 1.0)0.5 (-4.8 to 5.8)-0.8 (-3.8 to 2.2)
TC/HDL-C*-24.2 (-25.7 to -22.7)-31.2 (-34.1 to -28.4)-36.7 (-39.5 to -33.9)-39.1 (-41.0 to -37.3)-15.1 (-17.3 to -12.9)-30.2 (-35.6 to -24.7)-33.3 (-37.8 to -28.8)
Triglycerides*-14.4 (-17.3 to -11.4)-19.1 (-24.5 to -13.6)-23.6 (-29.5 to -17.7)-23.6 (-28.3 to -18.9)-7.3 (-13.2 to -1.4)-24.9 (-35.7 to -14.1)-20.7 (-29.5 to -11.9)
Non-HDL-C*-30.8 (-32.4 to -29.3)-40.6 (-43.5 to -37.7)-47.9 (-50.7 to -45.1)-50.0 (-52.3 to -47.6)-21.8 (-24.0 to -19.6)-38.3 (-44.9 to -31.7)-42.3 (-47.2 to -37.4)
Apo B*-30.6 (-32.0 to -29.1)-39.1 (-41.6 to -36.6)-46.2 (-48.7 to -43.6)-47.8 (-50.0 to -45.6)-22.3 (-24.2 to -20.4)-34.7 (-40.3 to -29.0)-39.1 (-43.6 to -34.6)
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=418)20 MG (N=103)40 MG (N=104)80 MG (N=214)20 MG (N=290)40 MG (N=47)80 MG (N=75)
Total cholesterol*-24.6 (-25.8 to -23.3)-31.6 (-33.6 to -29.5)-37.6 (-39.7 to -35.5)-39.5 (-41.4 to -37.6)-16.2 (-17.7 to -14.7)-30.3 (-33.5 to -27.2)-33.0 (-36.0 to -30.1)
LDL-C*-34.6 (-36.1 to -33.0)-43.4 (-46.1 to -40.6)-49.3 (-51.9 to -46.7)-50.3 (-52.7 to -47.9)-21.8 (-23.7 to -19.9)-40.4 (-44.1 to -36.7)-41.3 (-45.9 to -36.8)
HDL-C4.4 (2.9 to 5.8)2.9 (0.3 to 5.5)2.3 (-0.6 to 5.3)2.0 (-0.1 to 4.2)1.3 (-0.3 to 2.9)4.1 (0.3 to 7.8)-1.6 (-3.7 to 0.6)
TC/HDL-C*-26.6 (-28.1 to -25.1)-32.6 (-35.4 to -29.8)-38.2 (-40.6 to -35.9)-39.5 (-41.9 to -37.0)-16.2 (-18.0 to -14.4)-32.3 (-35.6 to -29.1)-31.4 (-34.8 to -28.1)
Triglycerides*-18.8 (-21.7 to -15.8)-22.8 (-27.9 to -17.8)-28.8 (-33.7 to -23.9)-29.5 (-33.0 to -26.0)-12.6 (-16.7 to -8.6)-32.4 (-39.1 to -25.6)-21.7 (-28.1 to -15.3)
Non-HDL-C*-32.2 (-33.7 to -30.7)-39.9 (-42.6 to -37.2)-46.7 (-49.1 to -44.3)-47.9 (-50.0 to -45.8)-20.9 (-22.8 to -19.1)-38.9 (-42.5 to -35.2)-39.8 (-43.3 to -36.3)
Apo B*-31.9 (-33.2, to -30.5)-39.4 (-41.9 to -37.0)-45.4 (-47.6 to -43.2)-45.4 (-47.4 to -43.4)-21.4 (-23.0 to -19.7)-36.2 (-39.5 to -32.8)-38.3 (-41.6 to -35.1)
CI, confidence interval; LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B.
*P<.05 from baseline for all doses.
P<.05 from baseline for a specific dose.

Metabolic syndrome

The ITT population included 1251 patients with MetSyn, of whom 56% also had diabetes and 67% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 78% (95% CI, 74.9%-80.5%) of statin-free and 57% (95% CI, 52.5%-62.1%) of statin-treated patients achieved LDL-C target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). Among patients without MetSyn (n=1454), 79% (95% CI, 76.2%-81.7%) of statin-free and 61% (95% CI, 56.8%-64.6%) of statin-treated patients achieved target. (Because of missing data, the presence or absence of MetSyn could not be confirmed in 12 patients.)

Mean percent reductions for MetSyn patients in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C, and apo B were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated patients ( TABLE 2 ). HDL-C increased significantly in the 10- and 20-mg statin-free groups and in the 40-mg statin-treated group.

Treatment was well tolerated

 

The incidences of treatment-related adverse events were similar in all patient groups, at around 10%. Most events were mild to moderate, with severe events reported in only 0.5% and 0.8% of patients with diabetes and MetSyn, respectively. Incidences of treatment-related musculoskeletal adverse events were 1.9% and 2%, respectively, in patients with and without diabetes; and were 1.7% and 2.3% in patients with and without MetSyn.

 

 

The incidence of elevations in aspartate aminotransferase (AST) or alanine aminotransferase (ALT) >3 times and creatine kinase (CK) >10 times the upper limit of normal were 1.1% and 0.1%, respectively, for patients with diabetes, and 0.9% and 0.08% for those with MetSyn, which did not differ from those of patients without diabetes (1.2% and 0%, respectively) or MetSyn (1.3% and 0%, respectively).

TABLE W1
Baseline lipid values for patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome (mean ± SD)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL225.8±32.7*210.8±29.9221.7±32.6
LDL-C, mg/dL149.4±26.8*133.8±24.3145.1±27.0
HDL-C, mg/dL50.0±12.550.2±12.050.1±12.4
TC/HDL-C4.7±1.1*4.4±1.04.6±1.1
Triglycerides, mg/dL173.8±85.1179.4±80.4175.3±83.8
Apo B, g/L1.1±0.21.1±0.21.1±0.2
HbA1C, %7.2±1.27.4±1.37.3±1.2
FPG, mmol/L8.2±2.98.2±2.68.2±2.8
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL229.3±34.1*215.7±32.7224.9±34.2
LDL-C, mg/dL152.3±27.8*137.8±26.6147.5±28.3
HDL-C, mg/dL45.3±11.046.1±10.445.5±10.8
TC/HDL-C5.3±1.3*4.9±1.15.2±1.2
Triglycerides, mg/dL206.4±88.7211.2±83.7208.0±87.1
Apo B, g/L1.2±0.21.1±0.21.2±0.2
HbA1C, %6.7±1.26.6±1.26.7±1.2
FPG, mmol/L7.4±2.57.1±2.37.3±2.4
LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B; HbA1C, hemoglobin A1C; FPG, fasting plasma glucose; SD, standard deviation.
*P<.05 statin-free vs statin-treated.

Discussion

 

Despite their increased cardiovascular risk, patients with diabetes and MetSyn often do not reach lipid targets.17 In patients with diabetes, lowering LDL-C levels reduces the risk of a cardiovascular event by 25% to 50%.18-23 Atorvastatin has demonstrated its efficacy for the primary prevention of cardiovascular events among patients with diabetes.22,23

MetSyn also increases the risk of cardiovascular events and mortality.10-13 Atorvastatin has been used effectively to achieve LDL-C goals in hypercholesterolemic patients with MetSyn.24,25

Higher starting doses of statins are generally beneficial. This substudy of ACTFAST demonstrates that by initiating therapy at doses selected according to baseline LDL-C levels, 81% of statin-free and 60% of statin-treated subjects with diabetes and 78% of statin-free and 57% of statin-treated subjects with MetSyn achieved a target LDL-C of <100 mg/dL within 6 to 12 weeks. Among statin-treated patients, atorvastatin provided additional reduction in lipid parameters over what was achieved with the statin they had been using at baseline.

Other studies have also suggested that patients at high risk for cardiovascular events, such as those with diabetes or MetSyn, may benefit from starting therapy at a higher dose of atorvastatin.14,15,26,27 In the New Atorvastatin Starting Doses: A Comparison (NASDAC) study, patients were randomized to receive various starting doses of atorvastatin, regardless of their baseline LDL-C value.26 The proportion of patients with CHD or a CHD-equivalent (of whom 150 had diabetes) who achieved LDL-C target (<100 mg/dL) with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg/d was 47%, 66%, 81% and 80%, respectively, demonstrating that a higher starting dose is required to achieve target.

 

However, lower doses may work depending on LDL-C levels. In contrast to NASDAC, statin-free patients with diabetes or MetSyn in ACTFAST showed better results on 10- and 20-mg doses, because baseline LDL-C was taken into account. The Atorvastatin Goal Achievement Across Risk Levels (ATGOAL) study used a design similar to ACTFAST, assigning patients with dyslipidemia to starting doses of atorvastatin for 8 weeks, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg, based on their CHD risk category and the magnitude of LDL-C reduction necessary to reach lipid targets.27 Of the 1298 patients, 705 were at high CHD risk (43.8% with diabetes), and 81.1% of these high-risk patients achieved an LDL-C <100 mg/dL.

No safety issues arose when initiating atorvastatin at higher doses in patients with diabetes or MetSyn. The incidence of clinically elevated AST, ALT, or CK levels in ACTFAST was low and comparable to that reported in meta-analyses (0.96%).28,29

Benefits of our dosing algorithm seem clear. Aggressive treatment with atorvastatin across the dose range improves LDL-C target achievement compared with usual care,30,31 and current NCEP-III recommendations support the use of a higher initial dose in patients requiring large LDL-C reductions.1 Atorva-statin is approved in many countries at starting doses ranging from 10 to 40 mg, with a titration to 80 mg, if needed, to achieve LDL-C target. ACTFAST suggests that, in patients with diabetes or MetSyn, initiation of atorvastatin at a dose appropriate for the required level of LDL-C reduction would facilitate achievement of LDL-C targets.

 

One meta-analysis of trials demonstrated that a 10-mg/dL reduction in LDL-C could result in a 5.4% reduction in major vascular events and a 3.1% reduction in all-cause mortality over 5 years.32 In our study, patients with diabetes or MetSyn experienced reductions in LDL-C of approximately 57 mg/dL, which, if maintained over 5 years, could be expected to translate into reductions of 30% in major vascular events and 17% in mortality. Therefore, a regimen that allows a larger number of high-risk patients to achieve substantial reductions in LDL-C levels quickly could significantly improve cardiovascular outcomes.

 

 

Limitations of our study include the fact that the trial was not blinded, the size of the dosing groups was unequal, and there was no control group. However, it is unlikely that reduction of LDL-C was due to chance. Also, this study was not designed to investigate the effect of lowering LDL-C on the incidence of cardiovascular events.

Correspondence
Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, University of Toronto, St. Michael's Hospital, 61 Queen St. E.,#6121Q, Toronto, Ontario, Canada. M5C 2T2; [email protected]

References

 

1. NCEP. Executive Summary of The Third Report of The National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation, And Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol In Adults (Adult Treatment Panel III). JAMA. 2001;285:2486-2497.

2. Olson K, Tsuyuki R. Patients' achievement of cholesterol targets: a cross-sectional evaluation. Am J Prev Med. 2003;25:339-342.

3. Pearson T, Laurora I, Chu H, et al. The lipid treatment assessment project (L-TAP): a multicenter survey to evaluate the percentages of dyslipidemic patients receiving lipid-lowering therapy and achieving low-density lipoprotein cholesterol goals. Arch Intern Med. 2000;160:459-467.

4. Leiter L, Betteridge D, Chacra A, et al. AUDIT study. Evidence of global undertreatment of dyslipidaemia in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Br J Diabetes Vasc Dis. 2006;6:31-40.

5. Haffner S, Lehto S, Ronnemaa T, et al. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med. 1998;339:229-234.

6. Grundy S, Cleeman J, Merz C, et al. Implications of recent clinical trials for the National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel III guidelines. Circulation. 2004;110:227-239.

7. Grundy SM. Diabetes and coronary risk equivalency: what does it mean? Diabetes Care. 2006;29:457-460.

8. Miettinen H, Lehto S, Salomaa V, et al. Impact of diabetes on mortality after the first myocardial infarction. The FINMONICA Myocardial Infarction Register Study Group. Diabetes Care. 1998;21:69-75.

9. Hurst RT, Lee RW. Increased incidence of coronary atherosclerosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus: mechanisms and management. Ann Intern Med. 2003;139:824-834.

10. McNeill A, Rosamond W, Girman C, et al. The metabolic syndrome and 11-year risk of incident cardiovascular disease in the atherosclerosis risk in communities study. Diabetes Care. 2005;28:385-390.

11. Lakka H, Laaksonen D, Lakka T, et al. The metabolic syndrome and total and cardiovascular disease mortality in middle-aged men. JAMA. 2002;288:2709-2716.

12. Hu G, Qiao Q, Tuomilehto J, et al. Prevalence of the metabolic syndrome and its relation to all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in nondiabetic European men and women. Arch Intern Med. 2004;164:1066-1076.

13. Ford E. The metabolic syndrome and mortality from cardiovascular disease and all-causes: findings from the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey II Mortality Study. Atherosclerosis. 2004;173:309-314.

14. Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al. Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study. Atherosclerosis. 2006;191:135-146.

15. Farsang C, Athyros V, Gaw A. A multicentre, open study to assess the effect of individualizing starting doses of atorvastatin according to baseline LDL-C levels on achieving cholesterol targets: the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST-2) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2007;23:1945-1956.

16. Report of the expert committee on the diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S5-S20.

17. Saydah SH, Fradkin J, Cowie CC. Poor control of risk factors for vascular disease among adults with previously diagnosed diabetes. JAMA. 2004;291:335-342.

18. Haffner S, Alexander C, Cook T, et al. Reduced coronary events in simvastatin-treated patients with coronary heart disease and diabetes or impaired fasting glucose levels: subgroup analyses in the Scandinavian Simvastatin Survival Study. Arch Intern Med. 1999;159:2661-2667.

19. Goldberg RB, Mellies MJ, Sacks FM, et al. Cardiovascular events and their reduction with pravastatin in diabetic and glucose-intolerant myocardial infarction survivors with average cholesterol levels: subgroup analyses in the cholesterol and recurrent events (CARE) trial. The Care Investigators. Circulation. 1998;98:2513-2519.

20. American Diabetes Association: clinical practice recommendations 2002. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S1-S147.

21. Sacks FM, Tonkin AM, Shepherd J, et al. Effect of pravastatin on coronary disease events in subgroups defined by coronary risk factors: the Prospective Pravastatin Pooling Project. Circulation. 2000;102:1893-1900.

22. Sever PS, Poulter NR, Dahlof B, et al. Reduction in cardiovascular events with atorvastatin in 2532 patients with type 2 diabetes: Anglo-Scandinavian Cardiac Outcomes Trial—lipid-lowering arm (ASCOT-LLA). Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1151-1157.

23. Colhoun HM, Betteridge DJ, Durrington PN, et al. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with atorvastatin in type 2 diabetes in the Collaborative Atorvastatin Diabetes Study (CARDS): multicentre randomised placebo-controlled trial. Lancet 2004;364:685-696.

24. Stender S, Schuster H, Barter P, et al. Comparison of rosuvastatin with atorvastatin, simvastatin and pravastatin in achieving cholesterol goals and improving plasma lipids in hypercholesterolaemic patients with or without the metabolic syndrome in the MERCURY I trial. Diabetes Obes Metab. 2005;7:430-438.

25. Hunninghake D, Ballantyne C, Maccubbin D, et al. Comparative effects of simvastatin and atorvastatin in hypercholesterolemic patients with characteristics of metabolic syndrome. Clin Ther. 2003;25:1670-1686.

26. Jones PH, McKenney JM, Karalis DG, et al. Comparison of the efficacy and safety of atorvastatin initiated at different starting doses in patients with dyslipidemia. Am Heart J. 2005;149(1):e1-e8.Available at: http://www.ahjonline.com/article/S0002-8703(04)00476-4/fulltext. Accessed September 10, 2008.

27. McKenney JM, Davidson MH, Saponaro J, et al. Use of a treatment algorithm to achieve NCEP ATP III goals with atorvastatin. J Cardiovasc Pharmacol. 2005;46:594-599.

28. Newman CB, Palmer G, Silbershatz H, et al. Safety of atorvastatin derived from analysis of 44 completed trials in 9416 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2003;92:670-676.

29. Newman C, Tsai J, Szarek M, et al. Comparative safety of atorvastatin 80 mg versus 10 mg derived from analysis of 49 completed trials in 14,236 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2006;97:61-67.

30. Athyros V, Papageorgiou A, Mercouris B, et al. Treatment with atorvastatin to the National Cholesterol Educational Program goal versus 'usual' care in secondary coronary heart disease prevention. The GREek Atorvastatin and Coronary-heart-disease Evaluation (GREACE) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2002;18:220-228.

31. Koren MJ, Hunninghake DB. Clinical outcomes in managed-care patients with coronary heart disease treated aggressively in lipid-lowering disease management clinics: the alliance study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2004;44:1772-1779.

32. Baigent C, Keech A, Kearney PM, et al. Efficacy and safety of cholesterol-lowering treatment: prospective meta-analysis of data from 90,056 participants in 14 randomised trials of statins. Lancet. 2005;366:1267-1278.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, FRCPC, FACP
Pierre Martineau, MSc, PharmD, BCPS
Eduardo de Teresa, MD, FESC
Csaba Farsang, MD, DSc
Allan Gaw, MD, PhD, MRCPath, FFPM
GianFranco Gensini, MD
Anatoly Langer, MD
On behalf of the ACTFAST 1 & 2 investigators. [email protected]
FROM: St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (LAL); Medical Division, Pfizer Canada, Kirkland, Quebec, Canada (PM); University of Malaga, V. de la Victoria Hospital, Malaga, Spain (EdT); St. Imre Teaching Hospital, Budapest, Hungary (CF); University of Glasgow, Glasgow, UK (AG); University of Florence, Careggi Hospital, Firenze, Italy (GG); and St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Ontario, Canada; and Canadian Heart Research Centre, Toronto (AL).

Dr. Leiter reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Merck & Co., Inc., Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, and Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Leiter also reports that he serves as a consultant to these companies and serves on their speakers' bureaus. Dr. Martineau reports that he is an employee of Pfizer Canada. Dr. de Teresa reports no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article. Dr. Farsang reports that he serves as a consultant to Sanofi-aventis, Pfizer, Inc., Servier, Egis Rt., and Richter, G.Rt. He also reports that he is on the speakers' bureau of Sanofi-aventis. Dr. Gaw reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck Sharp & Dohme, AstraZeneca International, Schering-Plough, and Bristol-Myers Squibb. He also reports that he serves on the speakers' bureaus for these companies. Dr. Gensini reports that he serves as a consultant to Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Langer reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Biovail Corporation, DuPont, Eli Lilly and Company, Fournier, GlaxoSmithKline, Guidant, Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Oryx Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, Sanofi-aventis, and Servier. He also reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, and Sanofi-aventis.

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
661-668
Legacy Keywords
low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C); algorithm; statin
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, FRCPC, FACP
Pierre Martineau, MSc, PharmD, BCPS
Eduardo de Teresa, MD, FESC
Csaba Farsang, MD, DSc
Allan Gaw, MD, PhD, MRCPath, FFPM
GianFranco Gensini, MD
Anatoly Langer, MD
On behalf of the ACTFAST 1 & 2 investigators. [email protected]
FROM: St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (LAL); Medical Division, Pfizer Canada, Kirkland, Quebec, Canada (PM); University of Malaga, V. de la Victoria Hospital, Malaga, Spain (EdT); St. Imre Teaching Hospital, Budapest, Hungary (CF); University of Glasgow, Glasgow, UK (AG); University of Florence, Careggi Hospital, Firenze, Italy (GG); and St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Ontario, Canada; and Canadian Heart Research Centre, Toronto (AL).

Dr. Leiter reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Merck & Co., Inc., Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, and Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Leiter also reports that he serves as a consultant to these companies and serves on their speakers' bureaus. Dr. Martineau reports that he is an employee of Pfizer Canada. Dr. de Teresa reports no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article. Dr. Farsang reports that he serves as a consultant to Sanofi-aventis, Pfizer, Inc., Servier, Egis Rt., and Richter, G.Rt. He also reports that he is on the speakers' bureau of Sanofi-aventis. Dr. Gaw reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck Sharp & Dohme, AstraZeneca International, Schering-Plough, and Bristol-Myers Squibb. He also reports that he serves on the speakers' bureaus for these companies. Dr. Gensini reports that he serves as a consultant to Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Langer reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Biovail Corporation, DuPont, Eli Lilly and Company, Fournier, GlaxoSmithKline, Guidant, Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Oryx Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, Sanofi-aventis, and Servier. He also reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, and Sanofi-aventis.

Author and Disclosure Information

 

Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, FRCPC, FACP
Pierre Martineau, MSc, PharmD, BCPS
Eduardo de Teresa, MD, FESC
Csaba Farsang, MD, DSc
Allan Gaw, MD, PhD, MRCPath, FFPM
GianFranco Gensini, MD
Anatoly Langer, MD
On behalf of the ACTFAST 1 & 2 investigators. [email protected]
FROM: St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (LAL); Medical Division, Pfizer Canada, Kirkland, Quebec, Canada (PM); University of Malaga, V. de la Victoria Hospital, Malaga, Spain (EdT); St. Imre Teaching Hospital, Budapest, Hungary (CF); University of Glasgow, Glasgow, UK (AG); University of Florence, Careggi Hospital, Firenze, Italy (GG); and St. Michael's Hospital, University of Toronto, Ontario, Canada; and Canadian Heart Research Centre, Toronto (AL).

Dr. Leiter reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Merck & Co., Inc., Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, and Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Leiter also reports that he serves as a consultant to these companies and serves on their speakers' bureaus. Dr. Martineau reports that he is an employee of Pfizer Canada. Dr. de Teresa reports no potential conflict of interest relevant to this article. Dr. Farsang reports that he serves as a consultant to Sanofi-aventis, Pfizer, Inc., Servier, Egis Rt., and Richter, G.Rt. He also reports that he is on the speakers' bureau of Sanofi-aventis. Dr. Gaw reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck Sharp & Dohme, AstraZeneca International, Schering-Plough, and Bristol-Myers Squibb. He also reports that he serves on the speakers' bureaus for these companies. Dr. Gensini reports that he serves as a consultant to Pfizer, Inc. Dr. Langer reports that he receives grants/research support from AstraZeneca International, Biovail Corporation, DuPont, Eli Lilly and Company, Fournier, GlaxoSmithKline, Guidant, Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Oryx Pharmaceuticals, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, Sanofi-aventis, and Servier. He also reports that he serves as a consultant to Merck/Schering-Plough Pharmaceuticals, Novartis, Pfizer, Inc., Roche, and Sanofi-aventis.

Article PDF
Article PDF

 

Practice recommendations

 

  • You can reduce elevated LDL-C levels in more patients with diabetes and metabolic syndrome using this study's algorithm.
  • Choose a starting dose of a statin according to the gap between baseline and target LDL-C values.
  • Using a tailored starting dose of atorvastatin, most patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome can achieve LDL-C target levels safely within 6 to 12 weeks, without raising the initial dose or with a single titration step.

 

Abstract

Purpose To investigate whether using an algorithm to select the starting dose of a statin according to baseline and target LDL-cholesterol (LDL-C) values would facilitate achieving lipid targets in patients with diabetes or the metabolic syndrome.

Methods Two 12-week, prospective, open-label trials enrolled 2717 high-risk subjects, of whom 1024 had diabetes and 1251 had metabolic syndrome. Subjects with LDL-C between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) were assigned a starting dose of atorvastatin (10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d) based on LDL-C level and status of statin use at baseline (statin-free [SF] or statin-treated [ST]), with a single uptitration at 6 weeks, if required.

Results Among patients with diabetes, 81% of SF subjects (82%, 84%, 82%, and 76% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 60% of ST subjects (61%, 68%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among patients with metabolic syndrome, 78% of SF subjects (81%, 84%, 82%, and 66% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 57% of ST subjects (58%, 70%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among ST subjects, we observed reductions in LDL-C with atorvastatin beyond those achieved with other statins used at baseline in patients with diabetes and patients with metabolic syndrome. Atorvastatin was well tolerated.

Conclusions The ACTFAST studies confirm that a targeted starting dose of atorvastatin allows most patients with type 2 diabetes or the metabolic syndrome to achieve their LDL-C target safely with the initial dose or just a single titration. This therapeutic strategy may help overcome the treatment gap still observed in the treatment of lipids in diabetes.

How many of your patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome have a low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level below the target of 100 mg/dL? Your answer, undoubtedly, is not enough of them. The good news we report in this article is that you can safely achieve the target more often, within 6 to 12 weeks, using a simple algorithm that helps you determine the optimal starting dose of a statin.

Good reason for concern. Individuals with coronary heart disease (CHD) or CHD risk equivalents such as diabetes have the highest cardiovascular risk and, according to the National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) III and other guidelines, must aim for the lowest target levels of LDL-C.1 As the number of cardiovascular risk factors increases in a population, the percentage of patients reaching targets decreases2,3 —to as low as 37% among those at highest risk.2 The international Analysis and Understanding of Diabetes and Dyslipidaemia: Improving Treatment (AUDIT) survey found that out of all patients with type 2 diabetes being treated, only 54% achieved target.4

Type 2 diabetes purportedly imparts a cardiovascular risk comparable to that of a prior cardiovascular event.1,5-7 Moreover, the outcome of such events in patients with diabetes is worse than in patients without diabetes, with approximately 7 out of 10 patients dying from the event or its complications.7-9

 

The metabolic syndrome (MetSyn) also increases risk of cardiovascular events and mortality, even in individuals without diabetes or CHD.10-13 In 1 study, the risks of all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in patients with MetSyn were 1.38 to 1.44 and 2.26 to 2.78, respectively, compared with those who did not have MetSyn.12

The algorithm we describe in this article was developed from results of the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) trials. These trials were designed to assess whether, according to the degree of reduction required in LDL-C, an optimal starting dose of atorvastatin could be identified so that patients would achieve LDL-C targets quickly, with no change in the dose or with just one titration step, and regardless of statin use at baseline.

The main results of ACTFAST 1 and 2 have been published elsewhere.14,15 We report specifically on a prespecified analysis of pooled results in the subset of patients with diabetes or MetSyn.

 

 

Methods

Patient population

We extracted the study population from prespecified pooling of data from ACTFAST 1 and 2,14,15 which were 12-week, multicenter, prospective, open-label trials that used the same protocol. A full description of inclusion and exclusion criteria for ACTFAST has been published elsewhere.14,15

Briefly, subjects were either statin-free or statin-treated at baseline, had CHD or a CHD equivalent, had an LDL-C level between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) and triglycerides =600 mg/dL (6.8 mmol/L), and were willing to follow a recommended diet.

We excluded patients if they had used other lipid-lowering therapy in the prior 2 months (except for statins in the statin-treated study arm) or if they were receiving >40 mg/d of any statin. Patients taking atorvastatin at screening were excluded because the study's goal was to assess the benefits of switching over to a flexible starting dose of atorvastatin. We defined diabetes and MetSyn according to the American Diabetes Association criteria16 and the NCEP 2001 criteria,1 respectively.

Doses reflected LDL-C baseline-target gap and prior statin use

If patients were statin free at baseline, we assigned them to 6 weeks of treatment with atorvastatin, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d, according to their baseline LDL-C level ( FIGURE 1 ). For patients who had been taking a statin at screening, starting doses of atorvastatin for each LDL-C increment were doubled.

If patients did not reach LDL-C targets at the end of 6 weeks, we titrated their regimen to the next higher dose for an additional 6 weeks. Patients initially allocated to receive atorvastatin at 80 mg who did not reach LDL-C targets continued at that dose, and we added a more intense therapeutic lifestyle intervention (NCEP II step 2 diet).1

We obtained blood samples at baseline screening, week 6, and week 12, to measure 12-hour fasting serum lipid profiles and to make routine safety assessments (hematology and chemistry). Patients received dietary counseling at all visits.

The ACTFAST protocol and amendments were approved by appropriately constituted central or local institutional review boards, and all patients gave written informed consent.

 

FIGURE 1
How treatment doses were determined

Statin-free patients received a specified dose of atorvastatin according to their baseline low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level. Patients who had been treated with another statin at screening received atorvastatin at a dose double that given to statin-free patients with equivalent LDL-C levels, for a maximum dose of 80 mg.



Reprinted from Atherosclerosis, vol. 191, Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al, Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study, 135-146, © 2006, with permission from Elsevier.

Primary efficacy outcome: LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL

The primary efficacy outcome was the proportion of patients with either diabetes or MetSyn achieving NCEP Adult Treatment Panel-III target LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL (<2.6 mmol/L) after 12 weeks of treatment.1 Secondary efficacy parameters were described in ACTFAST 1.14

We analyzed data according to intention-to-treat (ITT), using the last observation carried forward (LOCF) for missing data. The ITT population consisted of all patients who took at least 1 dose of study medication, and had at least 1 subsequent assessment.

Results

Between January 2003 and February 2004, 3634 subjects were screened for ACTFAST 1 and 2, and 2717 patients were enrolled from 12 countries (Canada, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Slovakia, Spain, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom). Ethnicity was recorded for about 80% of patients; more than 90% were Caucasian.

Diabetes

The ITT population included 1024 patients with diabetes, of whom 97% had type 2 diabetes and 73% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are available online, in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 81% (95% confidence interval [CI], 77.8%-83.5%) of statin-free and 60% (95% CI, 53.9%-65.4%) of statin-treated patients with diabetes achieved LDLC target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). In contrast, among patients without diabetes (n=1693), 77% (95% CI, 73.9%-79.3%) of statin-free and 59% (95% CI, 55.4%-62.5%) of statin-treated patients achieved target.

For diabetes patients, mean percent reductions in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C and apolipoprotein B (apo B) were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated subjects ( TABLE 2 ). Significant increases in HDL-C were seen only with the 10- and 80-mg doses in statin-free patients.

 

 

 

FIGURE 2
Patients who achieved an LDL-C level of <100 mg/dL
after receiving 12 weeks of atorvastatin

TABLE 1
Demographic profiles of patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Men, n (%)410 (55.1)161 (57.5)571 (55.8)
Age, years60.9±10.962.2±10.161.3±10.7
Weight, kg85.0±18.083.3±16.084.6±17.5
Waist circumference, cm103.3±13.8102.3±13.0103.0±13.6
Smokers, %16.512.515.4
Type 2 diabetes, % (% treated with insulin)96.8 (16.3)96.8 (16.6)96.8 (16.3)
Blood pressure, mm Hg137.1±15.7/79.6±9.6136.3±16.4/77.5±10.5136.9±15.9/79.0±9.9
CHD, %24.256.433.0
PVD, %5.57.96.2
CVD, %6.99.37.5
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Men, n (%)483 (57.6)248 (60.2)731 (58.4)
Age, years62.0±10.262.7±10.162.2±10.2
Weight, kg87.4±17.285.7±15.186.9±16.6
Waist circumference, cm106.2±12.3104.8±12.6105.7±12.4
Smokers, %23.019.721.9
Diabetes, % (% type 2 diabetes) (% treated with insulin)60.4 (98.6) (15.6)46.1 (98.9) (17.6)55.7 (98.7) (16.1)
Blood pressure, mm Hg140.1±14.8/81.4±9.3139.7±14.6/79.4±10.0140.0±14.7/80.7±9.6
CHD, %41.875.552.9
PVD, %6.49.07.3
CVD, %9.810.09.8
Mean±standard deviation for continuous variables.
CHD, coronary heart disease; PVD, peripheral vascular disease; CVD, cerebrovascular disease.

TABLE 2
Mean percent change (95% CI) in lipid levels from baseline when patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome took atorvastatin
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=395)20 MG (N=98)40 MG (N=90)80 MG (N=161)20 MG (N=216)40 MG (N=28)80 MG (N=36)
Total cholesterol*-23.0 (-24.3 to -21.7)-31.6 (-33.8 to -29.3)-38.1 (-40.5 to -35.7)-41.2 (-43.3 to -39.1)-16.9 (-18.6 to -15.2)-30.4 (-36.0 to -24.9)-34.2 (-39.4 to -30.0)
LDL-C*-33.9 (-35.6 to -32.2)-43.4 (-46.0 to -40.7)-51.0 (-54.1 to -48.0)-53.0 (-55.6 to -50.4)-23.9 (-26.3 to -21.6)-40.3 (-47.2 to -33.5)-42.1 (-50.2 to -33.9)
HDL-C2.9 (1.4 to 4.3)0.4 (-2.1 to 2.9)-0.7 (-3.9 to 2.6)-2.8 (-4.9 to -0.6)-0.8 (-2.6 to 1.0)0.5 (-4.8 to 5.8)-0.8 (-3.8 to 2.2)
TC/HDL-C*-24.2 (-25.7 to -22.7)-31.2 (-34.1 to -28.4)-36.7 (-39.5 to -33.9)-39.1 (-41.0 to -37.3)-15.1 (-17.3 to -12.9)-30.2 (-35.6 to -24.7)-33.3 (-37.8 to -28.8)
Triglycerides*-14.4 (-17.3 to -11.4)-19.1 (-24.5 to -13.6)-23.6 (-29.5 to -17.7)-23.6 (-28.3 to -18.9)-7.3 (-13.2 to -1.4)-24.9 (-35.7 to -14.1)-20.7 (-29.5 to -11.9)
Non-HDL-C*-30.8 (-32.4 to -29.3)-40.6 (-43.5 to -37.7)-47.9 (-50.7 to -45.1)-50.0 (-52.3 to -47.6)-21.8 (-24.0 to -19.6)-38.3 (-44.9 to -31.7)-42.3 (-47.2 to -37.4)
Apo B*-30.6 (-32.0 to -29.1)-39.1 (-41.6 to -36.6)-46.2 (-48.7 to -43.6)-47.8 (-50.0 to -45.6)-22.3 (-24.2 to -20.4)-34.7 (-40.3 to -29.0)-39.1 (-43.6 to -34.6)
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=418)20 MG (N=103)40 MG (N=104)80 MG (N=214)20 MG (N=290)40 MG (N=47)80 MG (N=75)
Total cholesterol*-24.6 (-25.8 to -23.3)-31.6 (-33.6 to -29.5)-37.6 (-39.7 to -35.5)-39.5 (-41.4 to -37.6)-16.2 (-17.7 to -14.7)-30.3 (-33.5 to -27.2)-33.0 (-36.0 to -30.1)
LDL-C*-34.6 (-36.1 to -33.0)-43.4 (-46.1 to -40.6)-49.3 (-51.9 to -46.7)-50.3 (-52.7 to -47.9)-21.8 (-23.7 to -19.9)-40.4 (-44.1 to -36.7)-41.3 (-45.9 to -36.8)
HDL-C4.4 (2.9 to 5.8)2.9 (0.3 to 5.5)2.3 (-0.6 to 5.3)2.0 (-0.1 to 4.2)1.3 (-0.3 to 2.9)4.1 (0.3 to 7.8)-1.6 (-3.7 to 0.6)
TC/HDL-C*-26.6 (-28.1 to -25.1)-32.6 (-35.4 to -29.8)-38.2 (-40.6 to -35.9)-39.5 (-41.9 to -37.0)-16.2 (-18.0 to -14.4)-32.3 (-35.6 to -29.1)-31.4 (-34.8 to -28.1)
Triglycerides*-18.8 (-21.7 to -15.8)-22.8 (-27.9 to -17.8)-28.8 (-33.7 to -23.9)-29.5 (-33.0 to -26.0)-12.6 (-16.7 to -8.6)-32.4 (-39.1 to -25.6)-21.7 (-28.1 to -15.3)
Non-HDL-C*-32.2 (-33.7 to -30.7)-39.9 (-42.6 to -37.2)-46.7 (-49.1 to -44.3)-47.9 (-50.0 to -45.8)-20.9 (-22.8 to -19.1)-38.9 (-42.5 to -35.2)-39.8 (-43.3 to -36.3)
Apo B*-31.9 (-33.2, to -30.5)-39.4 (-41.9 to -37.0)-45.4 (-47.6 to -43.2)-45.4 (-47.4 to -43.4)-21.4 (-23.0 to -19.7)-36.2 (-39.5 to -32.8)-38.3 (-41.6 to -35.1)
CI, confidence interval; LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B.
*P<.05 from baseline for all doses.
P<.05 from baseline for a specific dose.

Metabolic syndrome

The ITT population included 1251 patients with MetSyn, of whom 56% also had diabetes and 67% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 78% (95% CI, 74.9%-80.5%) of statin-free and 57% (95% CI, 52.5%-62.1%) of statin-treated patients achieved LDL-C target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). Among patients without MetSyn (n=1454), 79% (95% CI, 76.2%-81.7%) of statin-free and 61% (95% CI, 56.8%-64.6%) of statin-treated patients achieved target. (Because of missing data, the presence or absence of MetSyn could not be confirmed in 12 patients.)

Mean percent reductions for MetSyn patients in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C, and apo B were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated patients ( TABLE 2 ). HDL-C increased significantly in the 10- and 20-mg statin-free groups and in the 40-mg statin-treated group.

Treatment was well tolerated

 

The incidences of treatment-related adverse events were similar in all patient groups, at around 10%. Most events were mild to moderate, with severe events reported in only 0.5% and 0.8% of patients with diabetes and MetSyn, respectively. Incidences of treatment-related musculoskeletal adverse events were 1.9% and 2%, respectively, in patients with and without diabetes; and were 1.7% and 2.3% in patients with and without MetSyn.

 

 

The incidence of elevations in aspartate aminotransferase (AST) or alanine aminotransferase (ALT) >3 times and creatine kinase (CK) >10 times the upper limit of normal were 1.1% and 0.1%, respectively, for patients with diabetes, and 0.9% and 0.08% for those with MetSyn, which did not differ from those of patients without diabetes (1.2% and 0%, respectively) or MetSyn (1.3% and 0%, respectively).

TABLE W1
Baseline lipid values for patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome (mean ± SD)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL225.8±32.7*210.8±29.9221.7±32.6
LDL-C, mg/dL149.4±26.8*133.8±24.3145.1±27.0
HDL-C, mg/dL50.0±12.550.2±12.050.1±12.4
TC/HDL-C4.7±1.1*4.4±1.04.6±1.1
Triglycerides, mg/dL173.8±85.1179.4±80.4175.3±83.8
Apo B, g/L1.1±0.21.1±0.21.1±0.2
HbA1C, %7.2±1.27.4±1.37.3±1.2
FPG, mmol/L8.2±2.98.2±2.68.2±2.8
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL229.3±34.1*215.7±32.7224.9±34.2
LDL-C, mg/dL152.3±27.8*137.8±26.6147.5±28.3
HDL-C, mg/dL45.3±11.046.1±10.445.5±10.8
TC/HDL-C5.3±1.3*4.9±1.15.2±1.2
Triglycerides, mg/dL206.4±88.7211.2±83.7208.0±87.1
Apo B, g/L1.2±0.21.1±0.21.2±0.2
HbA1C, %6.7±1.26.6±1.26.7±1.2
FPG, mmol/L7.4±2.57.1±2.37.3±2.4
LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B; HbA1C, hemoglobin A1C; FPG, fasting plasma glucose; SD, standard deviation.
*P<.05 statin-free vs statin-treated.

Discussion

 

Despite their increased cardiovascular risk, patients with diabetes and MetSyn often do not reach lipid targets.17 In patients with diabetes, lowering LDL-C levels reduces the risk of a cardiovascular event by 25% to 50%.18-23 Atorvastatin has demonstrated its efficacy for the primary prevention of cardiovascular events among patients with diabetes.22,23

MetSyn also increases the risk of cardiovascular events and mortality.10-13 Atorvastatin has been used effectively to achieve LDL-C goals in hypercholesterolemic patients with MetSyn.24,25

Higher starting doses of statins are generally beneficial. This substudy of ACTFAST demonstrates that by initiating therapy at doses selected according to baseline LDL-C levels, 81% of statin-free and 60% of statin-treated subjects with diabetes and 78% of statin-free and 57% of statin-treated subjects with MetSyn achieved a target LDL-C of <100 mg/dL within 6 to 12 weeks. Among statin-treated patients, atorvastatin provided additional reduction in lipid parameters over what was achieved with the statin they had been using at baseline.

Other studies have also suggested that patients at high risk for cardiovascular events, such as those with diabetes or MetSyn, may benefit from starting therapy at a higher dose of atorvastatin.14,15,26,27 In the New Atorvastatin Starting Doses: A Comparison (NASDAC) study, patients were randomized to receive various starting doses of atorvastatin, regardless of their baseline LDL-C value.26 The proportion of patients with CHD or a CHD-equivalent (of whom 150 had diabetes) who achieved LDL-C target (<100 mg/dL) with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg/d was 47%, 66%, 81% and 80%, respectively, demonstrating that a higher starting dose is required to achieve target.

 

However, lower doses may work depending on LDL-C levels. In contrast to NASDAC, statin-free patients with diabetes or MetSyn in ACTFAST showed better results on 10- and 20-mg doses, because baseline LDL-C was taken into account. The Atorvastatin Goal Achievement Across Risk Levels (ATGOAL) study used a design similar to ACTFAST, assigning patients with dyslipidemia to starting doses of atorvastatin for 8 weeks, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg, based on their CHD risk category and the magnitude of LDL-C reduction necessary to reach lipid targets.27 Of the 1298 patients, 705 were at high CHD risk (43.8% with diabetes), and 81.1% of these high-risk patients achieved an LDL-C <100 mg/dL.

No safety issues arose when initiating atorvastatin at higher doses in patients with diabetes or MetSyn. The incidence of clinically elevated AST, ALT, or CK levels in ACTFAST was low and comparable to that reported in meta-analyses (0.96%).28,29

Benefits of our dosing algorithm seem clear. Aggressive treatment with atorvastatin across the dose range improves LDL-C target achievement compared with usual care,30,31 and current NCEP-III recommendations support the use of a higher initial dose in patients requiring large LDL-C reductions.1 Atorva-statin is approved in many countries at starting doses ranging from 10 to 40 mg, with a titration to 80 mg, if needed, to achieve LDL-C target. ACTFAST suggests that, in patients with diabetes or MetSyn, initiation of atorvastatin at a dose appropriate for the required level of LDL-C reduction would facilitate achievement of LDL-C targets.

 

One meta-analysis of trials demonstrated that a 10-mg/dL reduction in LDL-C could result in a 5.4% reduction in major vascular events and a 3.1% reduction in all-cause mortality over 5 years.32 In our study, patients with diabetes or MetSyn experienced reductions in LDL-C of approximately 57 mg/dL, which, if maintained over 5 years, could be expected to translate into reductions of 30% in major vascular events and 17% in mortality. Therefore, a regimen that allows a larger number of high-risk patients to achieve substantial reductions in LDL-C levels quickly could significantly improve cardiovascular outcomes.

 

 

Limitations of our study include the fact that the trial was not blinded, the size of the dosing groups was unequal, and there was no control group. However, it is unlikely that reduction of LDL-C was due to chance. Also, this study was not designed to investigate the effect of lowering LDL-C on the incidence of cardiovascular events.

Correspondence
Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, University of Toronto, St. Michael's Hospital, 61 Queen St. E.,#6121Q, Toronto, Ontario, Canada. M5C 2T2; [email protected]

 

Practice recommendations

 

  • You can reduce elevated LDL-C levels in more patients with diabetes and metabolic syndrome using this study's algorithm.
  • Choose a starting dose of a statin according to the gap between baseline and target LDL-C values.
  • Using a tailored starting dose of atorvastatin, most patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome can achieve LDL-C target levels safely within 6 to 12 weeks, without raising the initial dose or with a single titration step.

 

Abstract

Purpose To investigate whether using an algorithm to select the starting dose of a statin according to baseline and target LDL-cholesterol (LDL-C) values would facilitate achieving lipid targets in patients with diabetes or the metabolic syndrome.

Methods Two 12-week, prospective, open-label trials enrolled 2717 high-risk subjects, of whom 1024 had diabetes and 1251 had metabolic syndrome. Subjects with LDL-C between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) were assigned a starting dose of atorvastatin (10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d) based on LDL-C level and status of statin use at baseline (statin-free [SF] or statin-treated [ST]), with a single uptitration at 6 weeks, if required.

Results Among patients with diabetes, 81% of SF subjects (82%, 84%, 82%, and 76% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 60% of ST subjects (61%, 68%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among patients with metabolic syndrome, 78% of SF subjects (81%, 84%, 82%, and 66% with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) and 57% of ST subjects (58%, 70%, and 47% with 20, 40, and 80 mg, respectively) achieved LDL-C target. Among ST subjects, we observed reductions in LDL-C with atorvastatin beyond those achieved with other statins used at baseline in patients with diabetes and patients with metabolic syndrome. Atorvastatin was well tolerated.

Conclusions The ACTFAST studies confirm that a targeted starting dose of atorvastatin allows most patients with type 2 diabetes or the metabolic syndrome to achieve their LDL-C target safely with the initial dose or just a single titration. This therapeutic strategy may help overcome the treatment gap still observed in the treatment of lipids in diabetes.

How many of your patients with type 2 diabetes or metabolic syndrome have a low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level below the target of 100 mg/dL? Your answer, undoubtedly, is not enough of them. The good news we report in this article is that you can safely achieve the target more often, within 6 to 12 weeks, using a simple algorithm that helps you determine the optimal starting dose of a statin.

Good reason for concern. Individuals with coronary heart disease (CHD) or CHD risk equivalents such as diabetes have the highest cardiovascular risk and, according to the National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) III and other guidelines, must aim for the lowest target levels of LDL-C.1 As the number of cardiovascular risk factors increases in a population, the percentage of patients reaching targets decreases2,3 —to as low as 37% among those at highest risk.2 The international Analysis and Understanding of Diabetes and Dyslipidaemia: Improving Treatment (AUDIT) survey found that out of all patients with type 2 diabetes being treated, only 54% achieved target.4

Type 2 diabetes purportedly imparts a cardiovascular risk comparable to that of a prior cardiovascular event.1,5-7 Moreover, the outcome of such events in patients with diabetes is worse than in patients without diabetes, with approximately 7 out of 10 patients dying from the event or its complications.7-9

 

The metabolic syndrome (MetSyn) also increases risk of cardiovascular events and mortality, even in individuals without diabetes or CHD.10-13 In 1 study, the risks of all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in patients with MetSyn were 1.38 to 1.44 and 2.26 to 2.78, respectively, compared with those who did not have MetSyn.12

The algorithm we describe in this article was developed from results of the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) trials. These trials were designed to assess whether, according to the degree of reduction required in LDL-C, an optimal starting dose of atorvastatin could be identified so that patients would achieve LDL-C targets quickly, with no change in the dose or with just one titration step, and regardless of statin use at baseline.

The main results of ACTFAST 1 and 2 have been published elsewhere.14,15 We report specifically on a prespecified analysis of pooled results in the subset of patients with diabetes or MetSyn.

 

 

Methods

Patient population

We extracted the study population from prespecified pooling of data from ACTFAST 1 and 2,14,15 which were 12-week, multicenter, prospective, open-label trials that used the same protocol. A full description of inclusion and exclusion criteria for ACTFAST has been published elsewhere.14,15

Briefly, subjects were either statin-free or statin-treated at baseline, had CHD or a CHD equivalent, had an LDL-C level between 100 and 220 mg/dL (2.6-5.7 mmol/L) and triglycerides =600 mg/dL (6.8 mmol/L), and were willing to follow a recommended diet.

We excluded patients if they had used other lipid-lowering therapy in the prior 2 months (except for statins in the statin-treated study arm) or if they were receiving >40 mg/d of any statin. Patients taking atorvastatin at screening were excluded because the study's goal was to assess the benefits of switching over to a flexible starting dose of atorvastatin. We defined diabetes and MetSyn according to the American Diabetes Association criteria16 and the NCEP 2001 criteria,1 respectively.

Doses reflected LDL-C baseline-target gap and prior statin use

If patients were statin free at baseline, we assigned them to 6 weeks of treatment with atorvastatin, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg/d, according to their baseline LDL-C level ( FIGURE 1 ). For patients who had been taking a statin at screening, starting doses of atorvastatin for each LDL-C increment were doubled.

If patients did not reach LDL-C targets at the end of 6 weeks, we titrated their regimen to the next higher dose for an additional 6 weeks. Patients initially allocated to receive atorvastatin at 80 mg who did not reach LDL-C targets continued at that dose, and we added a more intense therapeutic lifestyle intervention (NCEP II step 2 diet).1

We obtained blood samples at baseline screening, week 6, and week 12, to measure 12-hour fasting serum lipid profiles and to make routine safety assessments (hematology and chemistry). Patients received dietary counseling at all visits.

The ACTFAST protocol and amendments were approved by appropriately constituted central or local institutional review boards, and all patients gave written informed consent.

 

FIGURE 1
How treatment doses were determined

Statin-free patients received a specified dose of atorvastatin according to their baseline low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) level. Patients who had been treated with another statin at screening received atorvastatin at a dose double that given to statin-free patients with equivalent LDL-C levels, for a maximum dose of 80 mg.



Reprinted from Atherosclerosis, vol. 191, Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al, Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study, 135-146, © 2006, with permission from Elsevier.

Primary efficacy outcome: LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL

The primary efficacy outcome was the proportion of patients with either diabetes or MetSyn achieving NCEP Adult Treatment Panel-III target LDL-C levels of <100 mg/dL (<2.6 mmol/L) after 12 weeks of treatment.1 Secondary efficacy parameters were described in ACTFAST 1.14

We analyzed data according to intention-to-treat (ITT), using the last observation carried forward (LOCF) for missing data. The ITT population consisted of all patients who took at least 1 dose of study medication, and had at least 1 subsequent assessment.

Results

Between January 2003 and February 2004, 3634 subjects were screened for ACTFAST 1 and 2, and 2717 patients were enrolled from 12 countries (Canada, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Slovakia, Spain, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom). Ethnicity was recorded for about 80% of patients; more than 90% were Caucasian.

Diabetes

The ITT population included 1024 patients with diabetes, of whom 97% had type 2 diabetes and 73% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are available online, in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 81% (95% confidence interval [CI], 77.8%-83.5%) of statin-free and 60% (95% CI, 53.9%-65.4%) of statin-treated patients with diabetes achieved LDLC target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). In contrast, among patients without diabetes (n=1693), 77% (95% CI, 73.9%-79.3%) of statin-free and 59% (95% CI, 55.4%-62.5%) of statin-treated patients achieved target.

For diabetes patients, mean percent reductions in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C and apolipoprotein B (apo B) were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated subjects ( TABLE 2 ). Significant increases in HDL-C were seen only with the 10- and 80-mg doses in statin-free patients.

 

 

 

FIGURE 2
Patients who achieved an LDL-C level of <100 mg/dL
after receiving 12 weeks of atorvastatin

TABLE 1
Demographic profiles of patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Men, n (%)410 (55.1)161 (57.5)571 (55.8)
Age, years60.9±10.962.2±10.161.3±10.7
Weight, kg85.0±18.083.3±16.084.6±17.5
Waist circumference, cm103.3±13.8102.3±13.0103.0±13.6
Smokers, %16.512.515.4
Type 2 diabetes, % (% treated with insulin)96.8 (16.3)96.8 (16.6)96.8 (16.3)
Blood pressure, mm Hg137.1±15.7/79.6±9.6136.3±16.4/77.5±10.5136.9±15.9/79.0±9.9
CHD, %24.256.433.0
PVD, %5.57.96.2
CVD, %6.99.37.5
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Men, n (%)483 (57.6)248 (60.2)731 (58.4)
Age, years62.0±10.262.7±10.162.2±10.2
Weight, kg87.4±17.285.7±15.186.9±16.6
Waist circumference, cm106.2±12.3104.8±12.6105.7±12.4
Smokers, %23.019.721.9
Diabetes, % (% type 2 diabetes) (% treated with insulin)60.4 (98.6) (15.6)46.1 (98.9) (17.6)55.7 (98.7) (16.1)
Blood pressure, mm Hg140.1±14.8/81.4±9.3139.7±14.6/79.4±10.0140.0±14.7/80.7±9.6
CHD, %41.875.552.9
PVD, %6.49.07.3
CVD, %9.810.09.8
Mean±standard deviation for continuous variables.
CHD, coronary heart disease; PVD, peripheral vascular disease; CVD, cerebrovascular disease.

TABLE 2
Mean percent change (95% CI) in lipid levels from baseline when patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome took atorvastatin
(This is an expanded version of the table that appeared in print.)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=395)20 MG (N=98)40 MG (N=90)80 MG (N=161)20 MG (N=216)40 MG (N=28)80 MG (N=36)
Total cholesterol*-23.0 (-24.3 to -21.7)-31.6 (-33.8 to -29.3)-38.1 (-40.5 to -35.7)-41.2 (-43.3 to -39.1)-16.9 (-18.6 to -15.2)-30.4 (-36.0 to -24.9)-34.2 (-39.4 to -30.0)
LDL-C*-33.9 (-35.6 to -32.2)-43.4 (-46.0 to -40.7)-51.0 (-54.1 to -48.0)-53.0 (-55.6 to -50.4)-23.9 (-26.3 to -21.6)-40.3 (-47.2 to -33.5)-42.1 (-50.2 to -33.9)
HDL-C2.9 (1.4 to 4.3)0.4 (-2.1 to 2.9)-0.7 (-3.9 to 2.6)-2.8 (-4.9 to -0.6)-0.8 (-2.6 to 1.0)0.5 (-4.8 to 5.8)-0.8 (-3.8 to 2.2)
TC/HDL-C*-24.2 (-25.7 to -22.7)-31.2 (-34.1 to -28.4)-36.7 (-39.5 to -33.9)-39.1 (-41.0 to -37.3)-15.1 (-17.3 to -12.9)-30.2 (-35.6 to -24.7)-33.3 (-37.8 to -28.8)
Triglycerides*-14.4 (-17.3 to -11.4)-19.1 (-24.5 to -13.6)-23.6 (-29.5 to -17.7)-23.6 (-28.3 to -18.9)-7.3 (-13.2 to -1.4)-24.9 (-35.7 to -14.1)-20.7 (-29.5 to -11.9)
Non-HDL-C*-30.8 (-32.4 to -29.3)-40.6 (-43.5 to -37.7)-47.9 (-50.7 to -45.1)-50.0 (-52.3 to -47.6)-21.8 (-24.0 to -19.6)-38.3 (-44.9 to -31.7)-42.3 (-47.2 to -37.4)
Apo B*-30.6 (-32.0 to -29.1)-39.1 (-41.6 to -36.6)-46.2 (-48.7 to -43.6)-47.8 (-50.0 to -45.6)-22.3 (-24.2 to -20.4)-34.7 (-40.3 to -29.0)-39.1 (-43.6 to -34.6)
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREESTATIN-TREATED
10 MG (N=418)20 MG (N=103)40 MG (N=104)80 MG (N=214)20 MG (N=290)40 MG (N=47)80 MG (N=75)
Total cholesterol*-24.6 (-25.8 to -23.3)-31.6 (-33.6 to -29.5)-37.6 (-39.7 to -35.5)-39.5 (-41.4 to -37.6)-16.2 (-17.7 to -14.7)-30.3 (-33.5 to -27.2)-33.0 (-36.0 to -30.1)
LDL-C*-34.6 (-36.1 to -33.0)-43.4 (-46.1 to -40.6)-49.3 (-51.9 to -46.7)-50.3 (-52.7 to -47.9)-21.8 (-23.7 to -19.9)-40.4 (-44.1 to -36.7)-41.3 (-45.9 to -36.8)
HDL-C4.4 (2.9 to 5.8)2.9 (0.3 to 5.5)2.3 (-0.6 to 5.3)2.0 (-0.1 to 4.2)1.3 (-0.3 to 2.9)4.1 (0.3 to 7.8)-1.6 (-3.7 to 0.6)
TC/HDL-C*-26.6 (-28.1 to -25.1)-32.6 (-35.4 to -29.8)-38.2 (-40.6 to -35.9)-39.5 (-41.9 to -37.0)-16.2 (-18.0 to -14.4)-32.3 (-35.6 to -29.1)-31.4 (-34.8 to -28.1)
Triglycerides*-18.8 (-21.7 to -15.8)-22.8 (-27.9 to -17.8)-28.8 (-33.7 to -23.9)-29.5 (-33.0 to -26.0)-12.6 (-16.7 to -8.6)-32.4 (-39.1 to -25.6)-21.7 (-28.1 to -15.3)
Non-HDL-C*-32.2 (-33.7 to -30.7)-39.9 (-42.6 to -37.2)-46.7 (-49.1 to -44.3)-47.9 (-50.0 to -45.8)-20.9 (-22.8 to -19.1)-38.9 (-42.5 to -35.2)-39.8 (-43.3 to -36.3)
Apo B*-31.9 (-33.2, to -30.5)-39.4 (-41.9 to -37.0)-45.4 (-47.6 to -43.2)-45.4 (-47.4 to -43.4)-21.4 (-23.0 to -19.7)-36.2 (-39.5 to -32.8)-38.3 (-41.6 to -35.1)
CI, confidence interval; LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B.
*P<.05 from baseline for all doses.
P<.05 from baseline for a specific dose.

Metabolic syndrome

The ITT population included 1251 patients with MetSyn, of whom 56% also had diabetes and 67% were statin-free ( TABLE 1 ). Baseline laboratory parameters are in TABLE W1 .

 

After 12 weeks of treatment, 78% (95% CI, 74.9%-80.5%) of statin-free and 57% (95% CI, 52.5%-62.1%) of statin-treated patients achieved LDL-C target of <100 mg/dL ( FIGURE 2 ). Among patients without MetSyn (n=1454), 79% (95% CI, 76.2%-81.7%) of statin-free and 61% (95% CI, 56.8%-64.6%) of statin-treated patients achieved target. (Because of missing data, the presence or absence of MetSyn could not be confirmed in 12 patients.)

Mean percent reductions for MetSyn patients in total cholesterol, TC/HDL-C, LDL-C, triglycerides, non-HDL-C, and apo B were significant vs baseline for all doses in both statin-free and statin-treated patients ( TABLE 2 ). HDL-C increased significantly in the 10- and 20-mg statin-free groups and in the 40-mg statin-treated group.

Treatment was well tolerated

 

The incidences of treatment-related adverse events were similar in all patient groups, at around 10%. Most events were mild to moderate, with severe events reported in only 0.5% and 0.8% of patients with diabetes and MetSyn, respectively. Incidences of treatment-related musculoskeletal adverse events were 1.9% and 2%, respectively, in patients with and without diabetes; and were 1.7% and 2.3% in patients with and without MetSyn.

 

 

The incidence of elevations in aspartate aminotransferase (AST) or alanine aminotransferase (ALT) >3 times and creatine kinase (CK) >10 times the upper limit of normal were 1.1% and 0.1%, respectively, for patients with diabetes, and 0.9% and 0.08% for those with MetSyn, which did not differ from those of patients without diabetes (1.2% and 0%, respectively) or MetSyn (1.3% and 0%, respectively).

TABLE W1
Baseline lipid values for patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome (mean ± SD)

 

DIABETESSTATIN-FREE (N=744)STATIN-TREATED (N=280)ALL (N=1024)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL225.8±32.7*210.8±29.9221.7±32.6
LDL-C, mg/dL149.4±26.8*133.8±24.3145.1±27.0
HDL-C, mg/dL50.0±12.550.2±12.050.1±12.4
TC/HDL-C4.7±1.1*4.4±1.04.6±1.1
Triglycerides, mg/dL173.8±85.1179.4±80.4175.3±83.8
Apo B, g/L1.1±0.21.1±0.21.1±0.2
HbA1C, %7.2±1.27.4±1.37.3±1.2
FPG, mmol/L8.2±2.98.2±2.68.2±2.8
METABOLIC SYNDROMESTATIN-FREE (N=839)STATIN-TREATED (N=412)ALL (N=1251)
Total cholesterol, mg/dL229.3±34.1*215.7±32.7224.9±34.2
LDL-C, mg/dL152.3±27.8*137.8±26.6147.5±28.3
HDL-C, mg/dL45.3±11.046.1±10.445.5±10.8
TC/HDL-C5.3±1.3*4.9±1.15.2±1.2
Triglycerides, mg/dL206.4±88.7211.2±83.7208.0±87.1
Apo B, g/L1.2±0.21.1±0.21.2±0.2
HbA1C, %6.7±1.26.6±1.26.7±1.2
FPG, mmol/L7.4±2.57.1±2.37.3±2.4
LDL-C, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol; HDL-C, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol; TC/HDL-C, total cholesterol/HDL-C ratio; Apo B, apolipoprotein B; HbA1C, hemoglobin A1C; FPG, fasting plasma glucose; SD, standard deviation.
*P<.05 statin-free vs statin-treated.

Discussion

 

Despite their increased cardiovascular risk, patients with diabetes and MetSyn often do not reach lipid targets.17 In patients with diabetes, lowering LDL-C levels reduces the risk of a cardiovascular event by 25% to 50%.18-23 Atorvastatin has demonstrated its efficacy for the primary prevention of cardiovascular events among patients with diabetes.22,23

MetSyn also increases the risk of cardiovascular events and mortality.10-13 Atorvastatin has been used effectively to achieve LDL-C goals in hypercholesterolemic patients with MetSyn.24,25

Higher starting doses of statins are generally beneficial. This substudy of ACTFAST demonstrates that by initiating therapy at doses selected according to baseline LDL-C levels, 81% of statin-free and 60% of statin-treated subjects with diabetes and 78% of statin-free and 57% of statin-treated subjects with MetSyn achieved a target LDL-C of <100 mg/dL within 6 to 12 weeks. Among statin-treated patients, atorvastatin provided additional reduction in lipid parameters over what was achieved with the statin they had been using at baseline.

Other studies have also suggested that patients at high risk for cardiovascular events, such as those with diabetes or MetSyn, may benefit from starting therapy at a higher dose of atorvastatin.14,15,26,27 In the New Atorvastatin Starting Doses: A Comparison (NASDAC) study, patients were randomized to receive various starting doses of atorvastatin, regardless of their baseline LDL-C value.26 The proportion of patients with CHD or a CHD-equivalent (of whom 150 had diabetes) who achieved LDL-C target (<100 mg/dL) with 10, 20, 40, and 80 mg/d was 47%, 66%, 81% and 80%, respectively, demonstrating that a higher starting dose is required to achieve target.

 

However, lower doses may work depending on LDL-C levels. In contrast to NASDAC, statin-free patients with diabetes or MetSyn in ACTFAST showed better results on 10- and 20-mg doses, because baseline LDL-C was taken into account. The Atorvastatin Goal Achievement Across Risk Levels (ATGOAL) study used a design similar to ACTFAST, assigning patients with dyslipidemia to starting doses of atorvastatin for 8 weeks, at 10, 20, 40, or 80 mg, based on their CHD risk category and the magnitude of LDL-C reduction necessary to reach lipid targets.27 Of the 1298 patients, 705 were at high CHD risk (43.8% with diabetes), and 81.1% of these high-risk patients achieved an LDL-C <100 mg/dL.

No safety issues arose when initiating atorvastatin at higher doses in patients with diabetes or MetSyn. The incidence of clinically elevated AST, ALT, or CK levels in ACTFAST was low and comparable to that reported in meta-analyses (0.96%).28,29

Benefits of our dosing algorithm seem clear. Aggressive treatment with atorvastatin across the dose range improves LDL-C target achievement compared with usual care,30,31 and current NCEP-III recommendations support the use of a higher initial dose in patients requiring large LDL-C reductions.1 Atorva-statin is approved in many countries at starting doses ranging from 10 to 40 mg, with a titration to 80 mg, if needed, to achieve LDL-C target. ACTFAST suggests that, in patients with diabetes or MetSyn, initiation of atorvastatin at a dose appropriate for the required level of LDL-C reduction would facilitate achievement of LDL-C targets.

 

One meta-analysis of trials demonstrated that a 10-mg/dL reduction in LDL-C could result in a 5.4% reduction in major vascular events and a 3.1% reduction in all-cause mortality over 5 years.32 In our study, patients with diabetes or MetSyn experienced reductions in LDL-C of approximately 57 mg/dL, which, if maintained over 5 years, could be expected to translate into reductions of 30% in major vascular events and 17% in mortality. Therefore, a regimen that allows a larger number of high-risk patients to achieve substantial reductions in LDL-C levels quickly could significantly improve cardiovascular outcomes.

 

 

Limitations of our study include the fact that the trial was not blinded, the size of the dosing groups was unequal, and there was no control group. However, it is unlikely that reduction of LDL-C was due to chance. Also, this study was not designed to investigate the effect of lowering LDL-C on the incidence of cardiovascular events.

Correspondence
Lawrence A. Leiter, MD, University of Toronto, St. Michael's Hospital, 61 Queen St. E.,#6121Q, Toronto, Ontario, Canada. M5C 2T2; [email protected]

References

 

1. NCEP. Executive Summary of The Third Report of The National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation, And Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol In Adults (Adult Treatment Panel III). JAMA. 2001;285:2486-2497.

2. Olson K, Tsuyuki R. Patients' achievement of cholesterol targets: a cross-sectional evaluation. Am J Prev Med. 2003;25:339-342.

3. Pearson T, Laurora I, Chu H, et al. The lipid treatment assessment project (L-TAP): a multicenter survey to evaluate the percentages of dyslipidemic patients receiving lipid-lowering therapy and achieving low-density lipoprotein cholesterol goals. Arch Intern Med. 2000;160:459-467.

4. Leiter L, Betteridge D, Chacra A, et al. AUDIT study. Evidence of global undertreatment of dyslipidaemia in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Br J Diabetes Vasc Dis. 2006;6:31-40.

5. Haffner S, Lehto S, Ronnemaa T, et al. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med. 1998;339:229-234.

6. Grundy S, Cleeman J, Merz C, et al. Implications of recent clinical trials for the National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel III guidelines. Circulation. 2004;110:227-239.

7. Grundy SM. Diabetes and coronary risk equivalency: what does it mean? Diabetes Care. 2006;29:457-460.

8. Miettinen H, Lehto S, Salomaa V, et al. Impact of diabetes on mortality after the first myocardial infarction. The FINMONICA Myocardial Infarction Register Study Group. Diabetes Care. 1998;21:69-75.

9. Hurst RT, Lee RW. Increased incidence of coronary atherosclerosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus: mechanisms and management. Ann Intern Med. 2003;139:824-834.

10. McNeill A, Rosamond W, Girman C, et al. The metabolic syndrome and 11-year risk of incident cardiovascular disease in the atherosclerosis risk in communities study. Diabetes Care. 2005;28:385-390.

11. Lakka H, Laaksonen D, Lakka T, et al. The metabolic syndrome and total and cardiovascular disease mortality in middle-aged men. JAMA. 2002;288:2709-2716.

12. Hu G, Qiao Q, Tuomilehto J, et al. Prevalence of the metabolic syndrome and its relation to all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in nondiabetic European men and women. Arch Intern Med. 2004;164:1066-1076.

13. Ford E. The metabolic syndrome and mortality from cardiovascular disease and all-causes: findings from the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey II Mortality Study. Atherosclerosis. 2004;173:309-314.

14. Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al. Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study. Atherosclerosis. 2006;191:135-146.

15. Farsang C, Athyros V, Gaw A. A multicentre, open study to assess the effect of individualizing starting doses of atorvastatin according to baseline LDL-C levels on achieving cholesterol targets: the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST-2) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2007;23:1945-1956.

16. Report of the expert committee on the diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S5-S20.

17. Saydah SH, Fradkin J, Cowie CC. Poor control of risk factors for vascular disease among adults with previously diagnosed diabetes. JAMA. 2004;291:335-342.

18. Haffner S, Alexander C, Cook T, et al. Reduced coronary events in simvastatin-treated patients with coronary heart disease and diabetes or impaired fasting glucose levels: subgroup analyses in the Scandinavian Simvastatin Survival Study. Arch Intern Med. 1999;159:2661-2667.

19. Goldberg RB, Mellies MJ, Sacks FM, et al. Cardiovascular events and their reduction with pravastatin in diabetic and glucose-intolerant myocardial infarction survivors with average cholesterol levels: subgroup analyses in the cholesterol and recurrent events (CARE) trial. The Care Investigators. Circulation. 1998;98:2513-2519.

20. American Diabetes Association: clinical practice recommendations 2002. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S1-S147.

21. Sacks FM, Tonkin AM, Shepherd J, et al. Effect of pravastatin on coronary disease events in subgroups defined by coronary risk factors: the Prospective Pravastatin Pooling Project. Circulation. 2000;102:1893-1900.

22. Sever PS, Poulter NR, Dahlof B, et al. Reduction in cardiovascular events with atorvastatin in 2532 patients with type 2 diabetes: Anglo-Scandinavian Cardiac Outcomes Trial—lipid-lowering arm (ASCOT-LLA). Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1151-1157.

23. Colhoun HM, Betteridge DJ, Durrington PN, et al. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with atorvastatin in type 2 diabetes in the Collaborative Atorvastatin Diabetes Study (CARDS): multicentre randomised placebo-controlled trial. Lancet 2004;364:685-696.

24. Stender S, Schuster H, Barter P, et al. Comparison of rosuvastatin with atorvastatin, simvastatin and pravastatin in achieving cholesterol goals and improving plasma lipids in hypercholesterolaemic patients with or without the metabolic syndrome in the MERCURY I trial. Diabetes Obes Metab. 2005;7:430-438.

25. Hunninghake D, Ballantyne C, Maccubbin D, et al. Comparative effects of simvastatin and atorvastatin in hypercholesterolemic patients with characteristics of metabolic syndrome. Clin Ther. 2003;25:1670-1686.

26. Jones PH, McKenney JM, Karalis DG, et al. Comparison of the efficacy and safety of atorvastatin initiated at different starting doses in patients with dyslipidemia. Am Heart J. 2005;149(1):e1-e8.Available at: http://www.ahjonline.com/article/S0002-8703(04)00476-4/fulltext. Accessed September 10, 2008.

27. McKenney JM, Davidson MH, Saponaro J, et al. Use of a treatment algorithm to achieve NCEP ATP III goals with atorvastatin. J Cardiovasc Pharmacol. 2005;46:594-599.

28. Newman CB, Palmer G, Silbershatz H, et al. Safety of atorvastatin derived from analysis of 44 completed trials in 9416 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2003;92:670-676.

29. Newman C, Tsai J, Szarek M, et al. Comparative safety of atorvastatin 80 mg versus 10 mg derived from analysis of 49 completed trials in 14,236 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2006;97:61-67.

30. Athyros V, Papageorgiou A, Mercouris B, et al. Treatment with atorvastatin to the National Cholesterol Educational Program goal versus 'usual' care in secondary coronary heart disease prevention. The GREek Atorvastatin and Coronary-heart-disease Evaluation (GREACE) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2002;18:220-228.

31. Koren MJ, Hunninghake DB. Clinical outcomes in managed-care patients with coronary heart disease treated aggressively in lipid-lowering disease management clinics: the alliance study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2004;44:1772-1779.

32. Baigent C, Keech A, Kearney PM, et al. Efficacy and safety of cholesterol-lowering treatment: prospective meta-analysis of data from 90,056 participants in 14 randomised trials of statins. Lancet. 2005;366:1267-1278.

References

 

1. NCEP. Executive Summary of The Third Report of The National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation, And Treatment of High Blood Cholesterol In Adults (Adult Treatment Panel III). JAMA. 2001;285:2486-2497.

2. Olson K, Tsuyuki R. Patients' achievement of cholesterol targets: a cross-sectional evaluation. Am J Prev Med. 2003;25:339-342.

3. Pearson T, Laurora I, Chu H, et al. The lipid treatment assessment project (L-TAP): a multicenter survey to evaluate the percentages of dyslipidemic patients receiving lipid-lowering therapy and achieving low-density lipoprotein cholesterol goals. Arch Intern Med. 2000;160:459-467.

4. Leiter L, Betteridge D, Chacra A, et al. AUDIT study. Evidence of global undertreatment of dyslipidaemia in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Br J Diabetes Vasc Dis. 2006;6:31-40.

5. Haffner S, Lehto S, Ronnemaa T, et al. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med. 1998;339:229-234.

6. Grundy S, Cleeman J, Merz C, et al. Implications of recent clinical trials for the National Cholesterol Education Program Adult Treatment Panel III guidelines. Circulation. 2004;110:227-239.

7. Grundy SM. Diabetes and coronary risk equivalency: what does it mean? Diabetes Care. 2006;29:457-460.

8. Miettinen H, Lehto S, Salomaa V, et al. Impact of diabetes on mortality after the first myocardial infarction. The FINMONICA Myocardial Infarction Register Study Group. Diabetes Care. 1998;21:69-75.

9. Hurst RT, Lee RW. Increased incidence of coronary atherosclerosis in type 2 diabetes mellitus: mechanisms and management. Ann Intern Med. 2003;139:824-834.

10. McNeill A, Rosamond W, Girman C, et al. The metabolic syndrome and 11-year risk of incident cardiovascular disease in the atherosclerosis risk in communities study. Diabetes Care. 2005;28:385-390.

11. Lakka H, Laaksonen D, Lakka T, et al. The metabolic syndrome and total and cardiovascular disease mortality in middle-aged men. JAMA. 2002;288:2709-2716.

12. Hu G, Qiao Q, Tuomilehto J, et al. Prevalence of the metabolic syndrome and its relation to all-cause and cardiovascular mortality in nondiabetic European men and women. Arch Intern Med. 2004;164:1066-1076.

13. Ford E. The metabolic syndrome and mortality from cardiovascular disease and all-causes: findings from the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey II Mortality Study. Atherosclerosis. 2004;173:309-314.

14. Martineau P, Gaw A, de Teresa E, et al. Effect of individualizing starting doses of a statin according to baseline LDL-cholesterol levels on achieving cholesterol targets: The Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST) study. Atherosclerosis. 2006;191:135-146.

15. Farsang C, Athyros V, Gaw A. A multicentre, open study to assess the effect of individualizing starting doses of atorvastatin according to baseline LDL-C levels on achieving cholesterol targets: the Achieve Cholesterol Targets Fast with Atorvastatin Stratified Titration (ACTFAST-2) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2007;23:1945-1956.

16. Report of the expert committee on the diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S5-S20.

17. Saydah SH, Fradkin J, Cowie CC. Poor control of risk factors for vascular disease among adults with previously diagnosed diabetes. JAMA. 2004;291:335-342.

18. Haffner S, Alexander C, Cook T, et al. Reduced coronary events in simvastatin-treated patients with coronary heart disease and diabetes or impaired fasting glucose levels: subgroup analyses in the Scandinavian Simvastatin Survival Study. Arch Intern Med. 1999;159:2661-2667.

19. Goldberg RB, Mellies MJ, Sacks FM, et al. Cardiovascular events and their reduction with pravastatin in diabetic and glucose-intolerant myocardial infarction survivors with average cholesterol levels: subgroup analyses in the cholesterol and recurrent events (CARE) trial. The Care Investigators. Circulation. 1998;98:2513-2519.

20. American Diabetes Association: clinical practice recommendations 2002. Diabetes Care. 2002;25(suppl 1):S1-S147.

21. Sacks FM, Tonkin AM, Shepherd J, et al. Effect of pravastatin on coronary disease events in subgroups defined by coronary risk factors: the Prospective Pravastatin Pooling Project. Circulation. 2000;102:1893-1900.

22. Sever PS, Poulter NR, Dahlof B, et al. Reduction in cardiovascular events with atorvastatin in 2532 patients with type 2 diabetes: Anglo-Scandinavian Cardiac Outcomes Trial—lipid-lowering arm (ASCOT-LLA). Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1151-1157.

23. Colhoun HM, Betteridge DJ, Durrington PN, et al. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with atorvastatin in type 2 diabetes in the Collaborative Atorvastatin Diabetes Study (CARDS): multicentre randomised placebo-controlled trial. Lancet 2004;364:685-696.

24. Stender S, Schuster H, Barter P, et al. Comparison of rosuvastatin with atorvastatin, simvastatin and pravastatin in achieving cholesterol goals and improving plasma lipids in hypercholesterolaemic patients with or without the metabolic syndrome in the MERCURY I trial. Diabetes Obes Metab. 2005;7:430-438.

25. Hunninghake D, Ballantyne C, Maccubbin D, et al. Comparative effects of simvastatin and atorvastatin in hypercholesterolemic patients with characteristics of metabolic syndrome. Clin Ther. 2003;25:1670-1686.

26. Jones PH, McKenney JM, Karalis DG, et al. Comparison of the efficacy and safety of atorvastatin initiated at different starting doses in patients with dyslipidemia. Am Heart J. 2005;149(1):e1-e8.Available at: http://www.ahjonline.com/article/S0002-8703(04)00476-4/fulltext. Accessed September 10, 2008.

27. McKenney JM, Davidson MH, Saponaro J, et al. Use of a treatment algorithm to achieve NCEP ATP III goals with atorvastatin. J Cardiovasc Pharmacol. 2005;46:594-599.

28. Newman CB, Palmer G, Silbershatz H, et al. Safety of atorvastatin derived from analysis of 44 completed trials in 9416 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2003;92:670-676.

29. Newman C, Tsai J, Szarek M, et al. Comparative safety of atorvastatin 80 mg versus 10 mg derived from analysis of 49 completed trials in 14,236 patients. Am J Cardiol. 2006;97:61-67.

30. Athyros V, Papageorgiou A, Mercouris B, et al. Treatment with atorvastatin to the National Cholesterol Educational Program goal versus 'usual' care in secondary coronary heart disease prevention. The GREek Atorvastatin and Coronary-heart-disease Evaluation (GREACE) study. Curr Med Res Opin. 2002;18:220-228.

31. Koren MJ, Hunninghake DB. Clinical outcomes in managed-care patients with coronary heart disease treated aggressively in lipid-lowering disease management clinics: the alliance study. J Am Coll Cardiol. 2004;44:1772-1779.

32. Baigent C, Keech A, Kearney PM, et al. Efficacy and safety of cholesterol-lowering treatment: prospective meta-analysis of data from 90,056 participants in 14 randomised trials of statins. Lancet. 2005;366:1267-1278.

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Page Number
661-668
Page Number
661-668
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
How to reach LDL targets quickly in patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome
Display Headline
How to reach LDL targets quickly in patients with diabetes or metabolic syndrome
Legacy Keywords
low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C); algorithm; statin
Legacy Keywords
low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C); algorithm; statin
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Malpractice minute

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 04/16/2018 - 14:22
Display Headline
Malpractice minute

Could a child’s suicide have been prevented?

THE PATIENT. A 9-year-old boy was undergoing psychiatric treatment.

CASE FACTS. A psychiatrist prescribed bupropion. The child committed suicide.

THE PARENTS’ CLAIM. The psychiatrist was negligent because he did not diagnose suicidal behavior during the initial visit and prescribed bupropion without proper warnings and follow-up.

THE DOCTOR’S DEFENSE. He did not receive information from the patient’s family that would have indicated suicidal behavior, bupropion was an appropriate treatment and was unrelated to the suicide, the family received proper warnings about the drug, and the suicide was unforeseeable.

Submit your verdict and find out how the court ruled and see how your colleagues voted in August’s Malpractice Minute. Click on “Have more to say about this topic?” to comment.

References

Cases are selected by Current Psychiatry from Medical Malpractice Verdicts, Settlements & Experts, with permission of its editor, Lewis Laska of Nashville, TN (www.verdictslaska.com). Information may be incomplete in some instances, but these cases represent clinical situations that typically result in litigation.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Publications
Page Number
54-54
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Author and Disclosure Information

Article PDF
Article PDF

Could a child’s suicide have been prevented?

THE PATIENT. A 9-year-old boy was undergoing psychiatric treatment.

CASE FACTS. A psychiatrist prescribed bupropion. The child committed suicide.

THE PARENTS’ CLAIM. The psychiatrist was negligent because he did not diagnose suicidal behavior during the initial visit and prescribed bupropion without proper warnings and follow-up.

THE DOCTOR’S DEFENSE. He did not receive information from the patient’s family that would have indicated suicidal behavior, bupropion was an appropriate treatment and was unrelated to the suicide, the family received proper warnings about the drug, and the suicide was unforeseeable.

Submit your verdict and find out how the court ruled and see how your colleagues voted in August’s Malpractice Minute. Click on “Have more to say about this topic?” to comment.

Could a child’s suicide have been prevented?

THE PATIENT. A 9-year-old boy was undergoing psychiatric treatment.

CASE FACTS. A psychiatrist prescribed bupropion. The child committed suicide.

THE PARENTS’ CLAIM. The psychiatrist was negligent because he did not diagnose suicidal behavior during the initial visit and prescribed bupropion without proper warnings and follow-up.

THE DOCTOR’S DEFENSE. He did not receive information from the patient’s family that would have indicated suicidal behavior, bupropion was an appropriate treatment and was unrelated to the suicide, the family received proper warnings about the drug, and the suicide was unforeseeable.

Submit your verdict and find out how the court ruled and see how your colleagues voted in August’s Malpractice Minute. Click on “Have more to say about this topic?” to comment.

References

Cases are selected by Current Psychiatry from Medical Malpractice Verdicts, Settlements & Experts, with permission of its editor, Lewis Laska of Nashville, TN (www.verdictslaska.com). Information may be incomplete in some instances, but these cases represent clinical situations that typically result in litigation.

References

Cases are selected by Current Psychiatry from Medical Malpractice Verdicts, Settlements & Experts, with permission of its editor, Lewis Laska of Nashville, TN (www.verdictslaska.com). Information may be incomplete in some instances, but these cases represent clinical situations that typically result in litigation.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Page Number
54-54
Page Number
54-54
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Malpractice minute
Display Headline
Malpractice minute
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media

CDC: Older kids should get annual flu vaccine, too

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/14/2019 - 11:24
Display Headline
CDC: Older kids should get annual flu vaccine, too

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has made 2 significant changes to its annual recommendations for the prevention of influenza during the 2008-2009 flu season:1

 

  1. Annual vaccination is now recommended for all children ages 6 months through 18 years. (Last year, universal influenza vaccination was recommended only for children ages 6 months through 4 years.)
  2. The live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV) can now be used starting at 2 years of age.

Vaccinate older children

The CDC now recommends that 5- to 18-year-olds receive the influenza vaccine annually, and that this routine vaccination start as soon as possible, but no later than the 2009-2010 flu season. In other words, if routine vaccination can be achieved this year it is encouraged, but the CDC recognizes that it may not be possible to achieve in some settings until next year.

If family physicians do not incorporate routine vaccination for those ages 5 to 18 this year, they should still provide it for those in this age group who are at high risk for influenza complications, including those who:

 

  • are on long-term aspirin therapy;
  • have chronic pulmonary (including asthma), cardiovascular, renal, hepatic, hematological, or metabolic disorders;
  • are immunosuppressed; or
  • have disorders that alter respiratory functions or the handling of respiratory secretions.

Children who live in households with others who are at higher risk (children who are <5 years old, adults >50 years, and anyone with a medical condition that places him or her at high risk for severe influenza complications) should also be vaccinated.

LAIV is an option for even younger kids

Last year, the LAIV vaccine was licensed for children starting at age 5. Now, the LAIV can be given to healthy children starting at age 2, as well as to adolescents and adults through age 49. TABLE 1 compares the LAIV with the trivalent influenza vaccine (TIV).

Because LAIV is an attenuated live virus vaccine, some children should not receive it, including those younger than 5 years of age with reactive airway disease (recurrent wheezing or recent wheezing); those with a medical condition that places them at high risk of influenza complications; and those younger than 2 years of age. The TIV can be used in these children, starting at 6 months of age.

Regardless of whether a child receives LAIV or TIV, those younger than 9 years of age who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart. If a child received only 1 dose in the first year, the following year he or she should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart.

TABLE 1
LAIV vs TIV: How the 2 compare

 

 LAIVTIV
Route of administrationIntranasal sprayIntramuscular injection
Type of vaccineLive attenuated virusKilled virus
Approved age2-49 years≥6 months
Interval between 2 doses recommended for children 6 months to 8 years who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time4 weeks4 weeks
Use with other live virus vaccinesSimultaneously or separated by 4 weeksNo restrictions
Use with influenza antiviral medicationWait 48 hours after last antiviral dose to administer LAIV; wait 2 weeks after LAIV to administer antiviralsNo restrictions
Contraindications and precautionsChronic illnessAnaphylactic hypersensitivity to eggs
Chronic aspirin therapyModerate-to-severe illness (precaution)
History of Guillain-Barre syndrome 
Pregnancy 
Caregiver to severely immune-suppressed individual 
LAIV, live attenuated influenza vaccine; TIV, trivalent influenza vaccine.

Coverage rates still need to improve

Influenza vaccine and antiviral agents continue to be underutilized. TABLE 2 lists estimated coverage with influenza vaccine for specific groups for whom immunization is recommended. It is particularly important that coverage rates for health care workers—which remain below 50%—be improved. Health care workers are at high risk of exposure to influenza and pose a risk of disease transmission to their families, other staff members, and patients. Family physicians should ensure that they and their staff are vaccinated each year.

Missed opportunities. Many patients for whom influenza vaccine is recommended fail to receive the vaccine because of missed opportunities. Physicians should offer the vaccine starting in October (or as soon as the vaccine supply allows) and continue to offer and encourage it through the entire flu season. Peak influenza activity can occur as late as April and May and occurs after February on average of 1 in every 5 years.

TABLE 2
Immunization is recommended, but what were the coverage rates?*

 

POPULATION GROUPCOVERAGE
Age 6-23 months32.2%
Age 2-4 years37.9%
Age ≥65 years65.6%
Pregnant women13.4%
Health care workers41.8%
Ages 18-64 years with high-risk conditions35.3%
* Influenza vaccination coverage is for the most recent year surveyed (2005-06 or 2006-07).

Autism concerns persist among parents

Despite clear scientific evidence that neither vaccines nor thimerosal preservative cause autism, some parents remain concerned. Some states have passed laws prohibiting the use of any thimerosal-containing vaccines and some parents may request thimerosal-free vaccines. TABLE 3 lists all the influenza vaccines and their thimerosal content.

 

 

TABLE 3
Which vaccines contain thimerosal—and how much?

 

VACCINETRADE NAMEMANUFACTURERHOW SUPPLIEDMERCURY CONTENT (MCG HG/0.5 ML DOSE)
TIVFluzoneSanofi Pasteur0.25-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL vial0
5-mL multidose vial25
TIVFluvirinNovartis Vaccines5-mL multidose vial25
0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluarixGlaxoSmithKline0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluLavalGlaxoSmithKline5-mL multidose vial25
TIVAfluriaCSL Biotherapies0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
5-mL multidose vial24.5
LAIVFluMistMedImmune0.2-mL sprayer0

Make use of antivirals

Two antiviral medications are licensed and approved for the treatment and prevention of influenza: oseltamivir (Tamiflu) and zanamivir (Relenza). Two others (amantadine and rimantadine) are licensed but not currently recommended due to the high rates of resistance that influenza has developed against them.

Oseltamivir is approved for the treatment and prophylaxis of influenza starting at 1 year of age.

Zanamivir is approved for the treatment of influenza starting at 7 years of age and for prophylaxis starting at 5 years of age.

Treatment, if started within 48 hours of symptom onset, reduces the severity and length of infection and the length of infectiousness. Antiviral prophylaxis should be considered when there is increased influenza activity for those listed in TABLE 4.

TABLE 4
Increased flu activity in the community? Consider antiviral prophylaxis

 

  • Individuals at high risk during the 2 weeks after influenza vaccination (after the second dose for children ages <9 years who have not previously been vaccinated)
  • Individuals at high risk for whom influenza vaccine is contraindicated
  • Family members or health care providers who are unvaccinated and are likely to have ongoing, close exposure to individuals at high risk, unvaccinated people, or infants who are <6 months of age
  • High-risk individuals and their family members and close contacts, as well as health care workers, when circulating strains of influenza virus in the community are not matched with vaccine strains
  • Individuals with immune deficiencies or those who might not respond to vaccination (eg, individuals infected with human immunodeficiency virus or with other immunosuppressed conditions, or those who are receiving immunosuppressive medications)
  • Unvaccinated staff members and other individuals during a response to an outbreak in a closed institutional setting with residents at high risk (eg, extended-care facilities).
Note: Recommended antiviral medications (neuraminidase inhibitors) are not licensed for prophylaxis of children <1 year of age (oseltamivir) or <5 years of age (zanamivir).

Every bit helps

Each year, influenza kills, on average, 36,000 Americans and hospitalizes another 200,000. Much of this morbidity and mortality could be avoided with full utilization of influenza vaccines and antiviral medications. You can contribute to improved public health by assuring that your patients and staff are fully immunized, that office infection control practices are adhered to, and that antiviral prophylaxis is used when indicated.

References

Reference

1. Prevention and control of influenza. Recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, 2008. MMWR;57(Early Release: July 17, 2008). Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr57e717a1.htm. Accessed August 25, 2008.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Doug Campos-Outcalt, MD, MPA
Department of Family and Community Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix
[email protected]

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
658-660
Legacy Keywords
Doug Campos-Outcalt; live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV); immunosuppressed; antiviral agents
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Doug Campos-Outcalt, MD, MPA
Department of Family and Community Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix
[email protected]

Author and Disclosure Information

 

Doug Campos-Outcalt, MD, MPA
Department of Family and Community Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix
[email protected]

Article PDF
Article PDF

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has made 2 significant changes to its annual recommendations for the prevention of influenza during the 2008-2009 flu season:1

 

  1. Annual vaccination is now recommended for all children ages 6 months through 18 years. (Last year, universal influenza vaccination was recommended only for children ages 6 months through 4 years.)
  2. The live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV) can now be used starting at 2 years of age.

Vaccinate older children

The CDC now recommends that 5- to 18-year-olds receive the influenza vaccine annually, and that this routine vaccination start as soon as possible, but no later than the 2009-2010 flu season. In other words, if routine vaccination can be achieved this year it is encouraged, but the CDC recognizes that it may not be possible to achieve in some settings until next year.

If family physicians do not incorporate routine vaccination for those ages 5 to 18 this year, they should still provide it for those in this age group who are at high risk for influenza complications, including those who:

 

  • are on long-term aspirin therapy;
  • have chronic pulmonary (including asthma), cardiovascular, renal, hepatic, hematological, or metabolic disorders;
  • are immunosuppressed; or
  • have disorders that alter respiratory functions or the handling of respiratory secretions.

Children who live in households with others who are at higher risk (children who are <5 years old, adults >50 years, and anyone with a medical condition that places him or her at high risk for severe influenza complications) should also be vaccinated.

LAIV is an option for even younger kids

Last year, the LAIV vaccine was licensed for children starting at age 5. Now, the LAIV can be given to healthy children starting at age 2, as well as to adolescents and adults through age 49. TABLE 1 compares the LAIV with the trivalent influenza vaccine (TIV).

Because LAIV is an attenuated live virus vaccine, some children should not receive it, including those younger than 5 years of age with reactive airway disease (recurrent wheezing or recent wheezing); those with a medical condition that places them at high risk of influenza complications; and those younger than 2 years of age. The TIV can be used in these children, starting at 6 months of age.

Regardless of whether a child receives LAIV or TIV, those younger than 9 years of age who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart. If a child received only 1 dose in the first year, the following year he or she should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart.

TABLE 1
LAIV vs TIV: How the 2 compare

 

 LAIVTIV
Route of administrationIntranasal sprayIntramuscular injection
Type of vaccineLive attenuated virusKilled virus
Approved age2-49 years≥6 months
Interval between 2 doses recommended for children 6 months to 8 years who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time4 weeks4 weeks
Use with other live virus vaccinesSimultaneously or separated by 4 weeksNo restrictions
Use with influenza antiviral medicationWait 48 hours after last antiviral dose to administer LAIV; wait 2 weeks after LAIV to administer antiviralsNo restrictions
Contraindications and precautionsChronic illnessAnaphylactic hypersensitivity to eggs
Chronic aspirin therapyModerate-to-severe illness (precaution)
History of Guillain-Barre syndrome 
Pregnancy 
Caregiver to severely immune-suppressed individual 
LAIV, live attenuated influenza vaccine; TIV, trivalent influenza vaccine.

Coverage rates still need to improve

Influenza vaccine and antiviral agents continue to be underutilized. TABLE 2 lists estimated coverage with influenza vaccine for specific groups for whom immunization is recommended. It is particularly important that coverage rates for health care workers—which remain below 50%—be improved. Health care workers are at high risk of exposure to influenza and pose a risk of disease transmission to their families, other staff members, and patients. Family physicians should ensure that they and their staff are vaccinated each year.

Missed opportunities. Many patients for whom influenza vaccine is recommended fail to receive the vaccine because of missed opportunities. Physicians should offer the vaccine starting in October (or as soon as the vaccine supply allows) and continue to offer and encourage it through the entire flu season. Peak influenza activity can occur as late as April and May and occurs after February on average of 1 in every 5 years.

TABLE 2
Immunization is recommended, but what were the coverage rates?*

 

POPULATION GROUPCOVERAGE
Age 6-23 months32.2%
Age 2-4 years37.9%
Age ≥65 years65.6%
Pregnant women13.4%
Health care workers41.8%
Ages 18-64 years with high-risk conditions35.3%
* Influenza vaccination coverage is for the most recent year surveyed (2005-06 or 2006-07).

Autism concerns persist among parents

Despite clear scientific evidence that neither vaccines nor thimerosal preservative cause autism, some parents remain concerned. Some states have passed laws prohibiting the use of any thimerosal-containing vaccines and some parents may request thimerosal-free vaccines. TABLE 3 lists all the influenza vaccines and their thimerosal content.

 

 

TABLE 3
Which vaccines contain thimerosal—and how much?

 

VACCINETRADE NAMEMANUFACTURERHOW SUPPLIEDMERCURY CONTENT (MCG HG/0.5 ML DOSE)
TIVFluzoneSanofi Pasteur0.25-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL vial0
5-mL multidose vial25
TIVFluvirinNovartis Vaccines5-mL multidose vial25
0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluarixGlaxoSmithKline0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluLavalGlaxoSmithKline5-mL multidose vial25
TIVAfluriaCSL Biotherapies0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
5-mL multidose vial24.5
LAIVFluMistMedImmune0.2-mL sprayer0

Make use of antivirals

Two antiviral medications are licensed and approved for the treatment and prevention of influenza: oseltamivir (Tamiflu) and zanamivir (Relenza). Two others (amantadine and rimantadine) are licensed but not currently recommended due to the high rates of resistance that influenza has developed against them.

Oseltamivir is approved for the treatment and prophylaxis of influenza starting at 1 year of age.

Zanamivir is approved for the treatment of influenza starting at 7 years of age and for prophylaxis starting at 5 years of age.

Treatment, if started within 48 hours of symptom onset, reduces the severity and length of infection and the length of infectiousness. Antiviral prophylaxis should be considered when there is increased influenza activity for those listed in TABLE 4.

TABLE 4
Increased flu activity in the community? Consider antiviral prophylaxis

 

  • Individuals at high risk during the 2 weeks after influenza vaccination (after the second dose for children ages <9 years who have not previously been vaccinated)
  • Individuals at high risk for whom influenza vaccine is contraindicated
  • Family members or health care providers who are unvaccinated and are likely to have ongoing, close exposure to individuals at high risk, unvaccinated people, or infants who are <6 months of age
  • High-risk individuals and their family members and close contacts, as well as health care workers, when circulating strains of influenza virus in the community are not matched with vaccine strains
  • Individuals with immune deficiencies or those who might not respond to vaccination (eg, individuals infected with human immunodeficiency virus or with other immunosuppressed conditions, or those who are receiving immunosuppressive medications)
  • Unvaccinated staff members and other individuals during a response to an outbreak in a closed institutional setting with residents at high risk (eg, extended-care facilities).
Note: Recommended antiviral medications (neuraminidase inhibitors) are not licensed for prophylaxis of children <1 year of age (oseltamivir) or <5 years of age (zanamivir).

Every bit helps

Each year, influenza kills, on average, 36,000 Americans and hospitalizes another 200,000. Much of this morbidity and mortality could be avoided with full utilization of influenza vaccines and antiviral medications. You can contribute to improved public health by assuring that your patients and staff are fully immunized, that office infection control practices are adhered to, and that antiviral prophylaxis is used when indicated.

The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has made 2 significant changes to its annual recommendations for the prevention of influenza during the 2008-2009 flu season:1

 

  1. Annual vaccination is now recommended for all children ages 6 months through 18 years. (Last year, universal influenza vaccination was recommended only for children ages 6 months through 4 years.)
  2. The live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV) can now be used starting at 2 years of age.

Vaccinate older children

The CDC now recommends that 5- to 18-year-olds receive the influenza vaccine annually, and that this routine vaccination start as soon as possible, but no later than the 2009-2010 flu season. In other words, if routine vaccination can be achieved this year it is encouraged, but the CDC recognizes that it may not be possible to achieve in some settings until next year.

If family physicians do not incorporate routine vaccination for those ages 5 to 18 this year, they should still provide it for those in this age group who are at high risk for influenza complications, including those who:

 

  • are on long-term aspirin therapy;
  • have chronic pulmonary (including asthma), cardiovascular, renal, hepatic, hematological, or metabolic disorders;
  • are immunosuppressed; or
  • have disorders that alter respiratory functions or the handling of respiratory secretions.

Children who live in households with others who are at higher risk (children who are <5 years old, adults >50 years, and anyone with a medical condition that places him or her at high risk for severe influenza complications) should also be vaccinated.

LAIV is an option for even younger kids

Last year, the LAIV vaccine was licensed for children starting at age 5. Now, the LAIV can be given to healthy children starting at age 2, as well as to adolescents and adults through age 49. TABLE 1 compares the LAIV with the trivalent influenza vaccine (TIV).

Because LAIV is an attenuated live virus vaccine, some children should not receive it, including those younger than 5 years of age with reactive airway disease (recurrent wheezing or recent wheezing); those with a medical condition that places them at high risk of influenza complications; and those younger than 2 years of age. The TIV can be used in these children, starting at 6 months of age.

Regardless of whether a child receives LAIV or TIV, those younger than 9 years of age who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart. If a child received only 1 dose in the first year, the following year he or she should receive 2 doses 4 weeks apart.

TABLE 1
LAIV vs TIV: How the 2 compare

 

 LAIVTIV
Route of administrationIntranasal sprayIntramuscular injection
Type of vaccineLive attenuated virusKilled virus
Approved age2-49 years≥6 months
Interval between 2 doses recommended for children 6 months to 8 years who are receiving influenza vaccine for the first time4 weeks4 weeks
Use with other live virus vaccinesSimultaneously or separated by 4 weeksNo restrictions
Use with influenza antiviral medicationWait 48 hours after last antiviral dose to administer LAIV; wait 2 weeks after LAIV to administer antiviralsNo restrictions
Contraindications and precautionsChronic illnessAnaphylactic hypersensitivity to eggs
Chronic aspirin therapyModerate-to-severe illness (precaution)
History of Guillain-Barre syndrome 
Pregnancy 
Caregiver to severely immune-suppressed individual 
LAIV, live attenuated influenza vaccine; TIV, trivalent influenza vaccine.

Coverage rates still need to improve

Influenza vaccine and antiviral agents continue to be underutilized. TABLE 2 lists estimated coverage with influenza vaccine for specific groups for whom immunization is recommended. It is particularly important that coverage rates for health care workers—which remain below 50%—be improved. Health care workers are at high risk of exposure to influenza and pose a risk of disease transmission to their families, other staff members, and patients. Family physicians should ensure that they and their staff are vaccinated each year.

Missed opportunities. Many patients for whom influenza vaccine is recommended fail to receive the vaccine because of missed opportunities. Physicians should offer the vaccine starting in October (or as soon as the vaccine supply allows) and continue to offer and encourage it through the entire flu season. Peak influenza activity can occur as late as April and May and occurs after February on average of 1 in every 5 years.

TABLE 2
Immunization is recommended, but what were the coverage rates?*

 

POPULATION GROUPCOVERAGE
Age 6-23 months32.2%
Age 2-4 years37.9%
Age ≥65 years65.6%
Pregnant women13.4%
Health care workers41.8%
Ages 18-64 years with high-risk conditions35.3%
* Influenza vaccination coverage is for the most recent year surveyed (2005-06 or 2006-07).

Autism concerns persist among parents

Despite clear scientific evidence that neither vaccines nor thimerosal preservative cause autism, some parents remain concerned. Some states have passed laws prohibiting the use of any thimerosal-containing vaccines and some parents may request thimerosal-free vaccines. TABLE 3 lists all the influenza vaccines and their thimerosal content.

 

 

TABLE 3
Which vaccines contain thimerosal—and how much?

 

VACCINETRADE NAMEMANUFACTURERHOW SUPPLIEDMERCURY CONTENT (MCG HG/0.5 ML DOSE)
TIVFluzoneSanofi Pasteur0.25-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
0.5-mL vial0
5-mL multidose vial25
TIVFluvirinNovartis Vaccines5-mL multidose vial25
0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluarixGlaxoSmithKline0.5-mL prefilled syringe≤1
TIVFluLavalGlaxoSmithKline5-mL multidose vial25
TIVAfluriaCSL Biotherapies0.5-mL prefilled syringe0
5-mL multidose vial24.5
LAIVFluMistMedImmune0.2-mL sprayer0

Make use of antivirals

Two antiviral medications are licensed and approved for the treatment and prevention of influenza: oseltamivir (Tamiflu) and zanamivir (Relenza). Two others (amantadine and rimantadine) are licensed but not currently recommended due to the high rates of resistance that influenza has developed against them.

Oseltamivir is approved for the treatment and prophylaxis of influenza starting at 1 year of age.

Zanamivir is approved for the treatment of influenza starting at 7 years of age and for prophylaxis starting at 5 years of age.

Treatment, if started within 48 hours of symptom onset, reduces the severity and length of infection and the length of infectiousness. Antiviral prophylaxis should be considered when there is increased influenza activity for those listed in TABLE 4.

TABLE 4
Increased flu activity in the community? Consider antiviral prophylaxis

 

  • Individuals at high risk during the 2 weeks after influenza vaccination (after the second dose for children ages <9 years who have not previously been vaccinated)
  • Individuals at high risk for whom influenza vaccine is contraindicated
  • Family members or health care providers who are unvaccinated and are likely to have ongoing, close exposure to individuals at high risk, unvaccinated people, or infants who are <6 months of age
  • High-risk individuals and their family members and close contacts, as well as health care workers, when circulating strains of influenza virus in the community are not matched with vaccine strains
  • Individuals with immune deficiencies or those who might not respond to vaccination (eg, individuals infected with human immunodeficiency virus or with other immunosuppressed conditions, or those who are receiving immunosuppressive medications)
  • Unvaccinated staff members and other individuals during a response to an outbreak in a closed institutional setting with residents at high risk (eg, extended-care facilities).
Note: Recommended antiviral medications (neuraminidase inhibitors) are not licensed for prophylaxis of children <1 year of age (oseltamivir) or <5 years of age (zanamivir).

Every bit helps

Each year, influenza kills, on average, 36,000 Americans and hospitalizes another 200,000. Much of this morbidity and mortality could be avoided with full utilization of influenza vaccines and antiviral medications. You can contribute to improved public health by assuring that your patients and staff are fully immunized, that office infection control practices are adhered to, and that antiviral prophylaxis is used when indicated.

References

Reference

1. Prevention and control of influenza. Recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, 2008. MMWR;57(Early Release: July 17, 2008). Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr57e717a1.htm. Accessed August 25, 2008.

References

Reference

1. Prevention and control of influenza. Recommendations of the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices, 2008. MMWR;57(Early Release: July 17, 2008). Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr57e717a1.htm. Accessed August 25, 2008.

Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Issue
The Journal of Family Practice - 57(10)
Page Number
658-660
Page Number
658-660
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
CDC: Older kids should get annual flu vaccine, too
Display Headline
CDC: Older kids should get annual flu vaccine, too
Legacy Keywords
Doug Campos-Outcalt; live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV); immunosuppressed; antiviral agents
Legacy Keywords
Doug Campos-Outcalt; live attenuated influenza vaccine (LAIV); immunosuppressed; antiviral agents
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media

Challenges in total laparoscopic hysterectomy: Severe adhesions

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 10:56
Display Headline
Challenges in total laparoscopic hysterectomy: Severe adhesions

Dr. Giesler reports that he serves on the speaker’s bureau for Ethicon Endo-Surgery. Dr. Vyas has no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Probable adhesions. Is laparoscopy practical?

A 54-year-old woman complains of perimenopausal bleeding that has not been controlled by hormone therapy, as well as increasing pelvic pain that has caused her to miss work. She wants you to perform hysterectomy to end these problems once and for all.

Aside from these complaints, her history is unremarkable except for a laparotomy at 13 years for a ruptured appendix. Her Pap smear, endometrial biopsy, and pelvic sonogram are negative.

Is she a candidate for laparoscopic hysterectomy?

A patient such as this one, who has a history of laparotomy, is likely to have extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. This pathology increases the risk of bowel injury during surgery—whether it is performed via laparotomy or laparoscopy.

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

The ability to simplify laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has extensive adhesions requires an understanding of the ways in which adhesions form—in order to lyse them skillfully and avoid creating further adhesions. It also requires special techniques to enter the abdomen, identify the site of attachment, separate adhered structures, and conclude the hysterectomy. Attention to the type of energy that is used also is important.

In this article, we describe these techniques and considerations.

In Part 1 of this article, we discussed techniques that facilitate laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has a large uterus.

Don’t overlook preoperative discussion, preparation

The patient needs to understand the risks and benefits of laparoscopic hysterectomy, particularly when extensive adhesions are likely, as well as the fact that it may be necessary to convert the procedure to laparotomy if the laparoscopic approach proves too difficult. She also needs to understand that conversion to laparotomy does not represent a failure of the procedure but an aim for greater safety.

Because bowel injury is a real risk when the patient has extensive adhesions, mechanical bowel preparation is important. Choose the regimen preferred by the colorectal surgeon likely to be consulted if intraoperative injury occurs.

The operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs also need to be prepared, and the patient should be positioned for optimal access in the OR. These and other preoperative steps are described in Part 1 of this article and remain the same for the patient who has extensive intra-abdominal adhesions.

How adhesions form

When the peritoneum is injured, a fibrinous exudate develops, causing adjacent tissues to stick together. Normal peritoneum immediately initiates a process to break down this exudate, but traumatized peritoneum has limited ability to do so. As a result, a permanent adhesion can form in as few as 5 to 8 days.1,2

Pelvic inflammatory disease and intraperitoneal blood associated with distant endometriosis implants are well known causes of abdominal adhesions; others are listed in the TABLE.

TABLE

7 causes of intra-abdominal adhesions

Instrument-traumatized tissue
Poor hemostasis
Devitalized tissue
Intraperitoneal infection
Ischemic tissue due to sutures
Foreign body reaction (carbon particles, suture)
Electrical tissue injury
Source: Ling FW, et al2

The challenge of safe entry

During laparotomy, adhesions can make it difficult to enter the abdomen. The same is true—but more so—for laparoscopic entry. The distortion caused by adhesions can lead to inadvertent injury to blood vessels, bowel, and bladder even in the best surgical hands. An attempt to lyse adhesions laparoscopically often prolongs the surgical procedure and increases the risk of visceral injury, bleeding, and fistula.1

In more than 80% of patients experiencing injury during major abdominal surgery, the injury is associated with omental adhesions to the previous abdominal wall incision, and more than 50% have intestine included in the adhesion complex.1

One study involving 918 patients who underwent laparoscopy found that 54.9% had umbilical adhesions of sufficient size to interfere with umbilical port placement.3 More important, 16% of this study group had only a single midline umbilical incision for laparoscopy before the adhesions were discovered.

The utility of Palmer’s point

Although multiple techniques have been described to minimize entry-related injury, no technique has completely eliminated the risk of inadvertent bowel or major large-vessel injury.3 In 1974, Palmer described an abdominal entry point for the Veress needle and small trocar for women who have a history of abdominal surgery.4 Many surgeons now consider “Palmer’s point,” in the left upper quadrant, as the safest peritoneal entry site.

 

 

Technique. After emptying the stomach of its contents using suction, insert the Veress needle into the peritoneal cavity at a point midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin (FIGURE). Advance it slowly until you hear three pops, signifying entry into the peritoneal cavity. Only minimal insertion is needed; insufflation pressure of less than 10 mm Hg indicates intraperitoneal placement of the needle tip.5

Once pneumoperitoneum pressure of 20 mm Hg is established, insert a 5-mm trocar perpendicular to the abdominal wall, 3 cm below the ribs, midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line.3 (There is a risk of colon injury at the splenic flexure if the entry point is further lateral.)

Inspect the abdominal cavity with the laparoscope from this access port to determine the best placement of remaining trocars under direct vision; lyse adhesions, if necessary, to perform the procedure.


FIGURE Enter the abdomen at Palmer’s point

This entry site (red dot) lies midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin. The other port sites (black dots) are described in Figure 2 in Part 1 of this article.

Success depends on careful lysis and minimal tissue injury

Adhesions in the abdomen may involve:

  • omentum to peritoneum
  • omentum to pelvic structures
  • intestine to peritoneum
  • intestine to pelvic structures.

Adhesions may be filmy and thin or dense and thick, avascular or vascular. They can be minimal, or a veritable curtain that prevents adequate visualization of the primary surgical site. When they are present, they must be managed successfully if the primary procedure is to be accomplished laparoscopically.

Successful management requires techniques to maximize adhesiolysis and minimize new adhesions or tissue injury:

  • Use traction and countertraction to define the line of attachment; this is essential to separate two tissues bound by adhesions.
  • Use atraumatic graspers to reduce the risk of tissue laceration.
  • Avoid sharp dissection with scissors. Although this is the traditional method of lysis, it is often associated with bleeding that stains and obscures the line of dissection.
  • Choose tools wisely. Electrosurgery and lasers use obliterative coagulation, working at temperatures of 150°C to 400°C to burn tissue. Blood and tissue are desiccated and oxidized, forming an eschar that covers and seals the bleeding area. Rebleeding during electrosurgery may occur when the instrument sticks to tissue and disrupts the eschar. In addition, monopolar instruments may cause undetected remote thermal injury, causing late complications.6 Both monopolar and bipolar techniques can also leave carbon particles during the oxidation process that become foci for future adhesions.7
  • Consider ultrasonic energy. Unlike electrosurgery, ultrasonic energy is mechanical and works at much lower temperatures (50°C to 100°C), controlling bleeding by coaptive coagulation. The ultrasonic blade, vibrating at 55,500 Hz, disrupts and denatures protein to form a coagulum that seals small coapted vessels. When the effect is prolonged, secondary heat seals larger vessels. Ultrasonic energy involves minimal thermal spread, minimal carbon particle formation, and a cavitation effect similar to hydrodissection that helps expose the adhesive line. It creates minimal smoke, improving visibility. Because ultrasonic energy operates at a lower temperature, less char and necrotic tissue—important causes of adhesions—occur than with bipolar or monopolar electrical energy.7

Although different energy sources interact with human tissue using different mechanisms, clinical outcomes appear to be much the same and depend more on the skill of the individual surgeon than on the power source used. Data on this topic are limited.

Thawing the frozen pelvis

Many patients have adhesions that involve omentum or intestine that can be managed using simple laparoscopic techniques, but some have organs that are fixed in the pelvis by adhesions. In these cases, traction and countertraction techniques can be tedious and may cause inadvertent injury to critical structures or excessive bleeding that necessitates conversion to laparotomy.

A better way to approach the obliterated, or “frozen,” pelvis is to open the retroperitoneal space and identify critical structures:

  • Enter the retroperitoneal space at the pelvic brim in an area free of adhesions. Identify the ureter and follow it to the bladder. This can be accomplished using hydrodissection techniques or cavitation techniques with ultrasonic energy.
  • Skeletonize, coagulate, and cut the vessels once you reach the cardinal ligament and identify the ascending uterine blood supply.
  • Dissect the structures of the obliterated cul de sac using standard techniques.
  • Use sharp dissection for adhesiolysis. Laparoscopic blunt dissection of adhesions can lead to serosal tears and inadvertent enterotomy. Sharp dissection or mechanical energy devices are preferred to divide the tissue along the line of demarcation—but remember that monopolar and bipolar devices can cause remote thermal damage that goes undetected at the time of use.
 

 

When dissection becomes unproductive in one area, switch to another; dissection planes frequently open and demonstrate the relationships between pelvic structures and loops of bowel.8

Occasionally, the visceral peritoneum of the bowel is breached during adhesiolysis. If the mucosa and muscularis remain intact, denuded serosa need not be repaired. Surgical repair is necessary if mucosa is exposed, or perforation may occur.

Because most ObGyn residency programs offer limited training in management of bowel injuries, intraoperative consultation with a general surgeon may be indicated if more than a simple repair is required.8

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find multiple adhesions in the right lower quadrant, adjacent to the area of trocar insertion. Small intestine is adherent to the right lateral pelvic wall; sigmoid colon is adherent to the left pelvic wall; and the anterior fundus is adherent to the bladder peritoneal reflection, with the adhesions extending on either side to include the round ligaments.

You begin adhesiolysis in the right lower quadrant to optimize trocar movement. You transect the round ligaments in the mid-position, with dissection extended retroperitoneally on either side to the midline of the lower uterine segment; this opens access to the ascending branch of the uterine vessels. You dissect the intestine free of either pelvic sidewall along the line of demarcation.

Total blood loss is less than 25 mL. The patient is discharged 6 hours after surgery.

References

1. Liakakos T, Thomakos N, Fine PM, Dervenis C, Young RL. Peritoneal adhesions: etiology, pathophysiology, and clinical significance. Recent advances in prevention and management. Dig Surg. 2001;18:260-273.

2. Ling FW, DeCherney AH, Diamond MP, diZerega GS, Montz FP. The Challenge of Pelvic Adhesions. Crofton, Md: Association of Professors of Gynecology and Obstetrics; 2002.

3. Agarwala N, Liu CY. Safe entry techniques during laparoscopy: left upper quadrant entry using the ninth intercostals space—a review of 918 procedures. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:55-61.

4. Palmer R. Safety in laparoscopy. J Reprod Med. 1974;13(1):1-5.

5. Childers JM, Brzechffa PR, Surwit EA. Laparoscopy using the left upper quadrant as the primary trocar site. Gynecol Oncol. 1993;50:221-225.

6. Shen CC, Wu MP, Lu CH, et al. Small intestine injury in laparoscopic-assisted vaginal hysterectomy. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2003;10:350-355.

7. Diamantis T, Kontos M, Arvelakis A, et al. Comparison of monopolar electrocoagulation, bipolar electrocoagulation, Ultracision, and Ligasure. Surg Today. 2006;36:908-913.

8. Perkins JD, Dent LL. Avoiding and repairing bowel injury in gynecologic surgery. OBG Management. 2004;16(8):15-28.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Publications
Page Number
61-64
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas MD; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; severe adhesions; adhesions; laparoscopy; ultrasonic energy; abdominal surgery; omental adhesions; visceral peritoneum; laparotomy; bowel injury; intra-abdominal adhesions; intraperitoneal infection; Palmer’s point; pneumoperitoneum pressure; colon injury; electrosurgery; lasers; frozen pelvis
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Dr. Giesler reports that he serves on the speaker’s bureau for Ethicon Endo-Surgery. Dr. Vyas has no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Probable adhesions. Is laparoscopy practical?

A 54-year-old woman complains of perimenopausal bleeding that has not been controlled by hormone therapy, as well as increasing pelvic pain that has caused her to miss work. She wants you to perform hysterectomy to end these problems once and for all.

Aside from these complaints, her history is unremarkable except for a laparotomy at 13 years for a ruptured appendix. Her Pap smear, endometrial biopsy, and pelvic sonogram are negative.

Is she a candidate for laparoscopic hysterectomy?

A patient such as this one, who has a history of laparotomy, is likely to have extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. This pathology increases the risk of bowel injury during surgery—whether it is performed via laparotomy or laparoscopy.

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

The ability to simplify laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has extensive adhesions requires an understanding of the ways in which adhesions form—in order to lyse them skillfully and avoid creating further adhesions. It also requires special techniques to enter the abdomen, identify the site of attachment, separate adhered structures, and conclude the hysterectomy. Attention to the type of energy that is used also is important.

In this article, we describe these techniques and considerations.

In Part 1 of this article, we discussed techniques that facilitate laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has a large uterus.

Don’t overlook preoperative discussion, preparation

The patient needs to understand the risks and benefits of laparoscopic hysterectomy, particularly when extensive adhesions are likely, as well as the fact that it may be necessary to convert the procedure to laparotomy if the laparoscopic approach proves too difficult. She also needs to understand that conversion to laparotomy does not represent a failure of the procedure but an aim for greater safety.

Because bowel injury is a real risk when the patient has extensive adhesions, mechanical bowel preparation is important. Choose the regimen preferred by the colorectal surgeon likely to be consulted if intraoperative injury occurs.

The operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs also need to be prepared, and the patient should be positioned for optimal access in the OR. These and other preoperative steps are described in Part 1 of this article and remain the same for the patient who has extensive intra-abdominal adhesions.

How adhesions form

When the peritoneum is injured, a fibrinous exudate develops, causing adjacent tissues to stick together. Normal peritoneum immediately initiates a process to break down this exudate, but traumatized peritoneum has limited ability to do so. As a result, a permanent adhesion can form in as few as 5 to 8 days.1,2

Pelvic inflammatory disease and intraperitoneal blood associated with distant endometriosis implants are well known causes of abdominal adhesions; others are listed in the TABLE.

TABLE

7 causes of intra-abdominal adhesions

Instrument-traumatized tissue
Poor hemostasis
Devitalized tissue
Intraperitoneal infection
Ischemic tissue due to sutures
Foreign body reaction (carbon particles, suture)
Electrical tissue injury
Source: Ling FW, et al2

The challenge of safe entry

During laparotomy, adhesions can make it difficult to enter the abdomen. The same is true—but more so—for laparoscopic entry. The distortion caused by adhesions can lead to inadvertent injury to blood vessels, bowel, and bladder even in the best surgical hands. An attempt to lyse adhesions laparoscopically often prolongs the surgical procedure and increases the risk of visceral injury, bleeding, and fistula.1

In more than 80% of patients experiencing injury during major abdominal surgery, the injury is associated with omental adhesions to the previous abdominal wall incision, and more than 50% have intestine included in the adhesion complex.1

One study involving 918 patients who underwent laparoscopy found that 54.9% had umbilical adhesions of sufficient size to interfere with umbilical port placement.3 More important, 16% of this study group had only a single midline umbilical incision for laparoscopy before the adhesions were discovered.

The utility of Palmer’s point

Although multiple techniques have been described to minimize entry-related injury, no technique has completely eliminated the risk of inadvertent bowel or major large-vessel injury.3 In 1974, Palmer described an abdominal entry point for the Veress needle and small trocar for women who have a history of abdominal surgery.4 Many surgeons now consider “Palmer’s point,” in the left upper quadrant, as the safest peritoneal entry site.

 

 

Technique. After emptying the stomach of its contents using suction, insert the Veress needle into the peritoneal cavity at a point midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin (FIGURE). Advance it slowly until you hear three pops, signifying entry into the peritoneal cavity. Only minimal insertion is needed; insufflation pressure of less than 10 mm Hg indicates intraperitoneal placement of the needle tip.5

Once pneumoperitoneum pressure of 20 mm Hg is established, insert a 5-mm trocar perpendicular to the abdominal wall, 3 cm below the ribs, midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line.3 (There is a risk of colon injury at the splenic flexure if the entry point is further lateral.)

Inspect the abdominal cavity with the laparoscope from this access port to determine the best placement of remaining trocars under direct vision; lyse adhesions, if necessary, to perform the procedure.


FIGURE Enter the abdomen at Palmer’s point

This entry site (red dot) lies midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin. The other port sites (black dots) are described in Figure 2 in Part 1 of this article.

Success depends on careful lysis and minimal tissue injury

Adhesions in the abdomen may involve:

  • omentum to peritoneum
  • omentum to pelvic structures
  • intestine to peritoneum
  • intestine to pelvic structures.

Adhesions may be filmy and thin or dense and thick, avascular or vascular. They can be minimal, or a veritable curtain that prevents adequate visualization of the primary surgical site. When they are present, they must be managed successfully if the primary procedure is to be accomplished laparoscopically.

Successful management requires techniques to maximize adhesiolysis and minimize new adhesions or tissue injury:

  • Use traction and countertraction to define the line of attachment; this is essential to separate two tissues bound by adhesions.
  • Use atraumatic graspers to reduce the risk of tissue laceration.
  • Avoid sharp dissection with scissors. Although this is the traditional method of lysis, it is often associated with bleeding that stains and obscures the line of dissection.
  • Choose tools wisely. Electrosurgery and lasers use obliterative coagulation, working at temperatures of 150°C to 400°C to burn tissue. Blood and tissue are desiccated and oxidized, forming an eschar that covers and seals the bleeding area. Rebleeding during electrosurgery may occur when the instrument sticks to tissue and disrupts the eschar. In addition, monopolar instruments may cause undetected remote thermal injury, causing late complications.6 Both monopolar and bipolar techniques can also leave carbon particles during the oxidation process that become foci for future adhesions.7
  • Consider ultrasonic energy. Unlike electrosurgery, ultrasonic energy is mechanical and works at much lower temperatures (50°C to 100°C), controlling bleeding by coaptive coagulation. The ultrasonic blade, vibrating at 55,500 Hz, disrupts and denatures protein to form a coagulum that seals small coapted vessels. When the effect is prolonged, secondary heat seals larger vessels. Ultrasonic energy involves minimal thermal spread, minimal carbon particle formation, and a cavitation effect similar to hydrodissection that helps expose the adhesive line. It creates minimal smoke, improving visibility. Because ultrasonic energy operates at a lower temperature, less char and necrotic tissue—important causes of adhesions—occur than with bipolar or monopolar electrical energy.7

Although different energy sources interact with human tissue using different mechanisms, clinical outcomes appear to be much the same and depend more on the skill of the individual surgeon than on the power source used. Data on this topic are limited.

Thawing the frozen pelvis

Many patients have adhesions that involve omentum or intestine that can be managed using simple laparoscopic techniques, but some have organs that are fixed in the pelvis by adhesions. In these cases, traction and countertraction techniques can be tedious and may cause inadvertent injury to critical structures or excessive bleeding that necessitates conversion to laparotomy.

A better way to approach the obliterated, or “frozen,” pelvis is to open the retroperitoneal space and identify critical structures:

  • Enter the retroperitoneal space at the pelvic brim in an area free of adhesions. Identify the ureter and follow it to the bladder. This can be accomplished using hydrodissection techniques or cavitation techniques with ultrasonic energy.
  • Skeletonize, coagulate, and cut the vessels once you reach the cardinal ligament and identify the ascending uterine blood supply.
  • Dissect the structures of the obliterated cul de sac using standard techniques.
  • Use sharp dissection for adhesiolysis. Laparoscopic blunt dissection of adhesions can lead to serosal tears and inadvertent enterotomy. Sharp dissection or mechanical energy devices are preferred to divide the tissue along the line of demarcation—but remember that monopolar and bipolar devices can cause remote thermal damage that goes undetected at the time of use.
 

 

When dissection becomes unproductive in one area, switch to another; dissection planes frequently open and demonstrate the relationships between pelvic structures and loops of bowel.8

Occasionally, the visceral peritoneum of the bowel is breached during adhesiolysis. If the mucosa and muscularis remain intact, denuded serosa need not be repaired. Surgical repair is necessary if mucosa is exposed, or perforation may occur.

Because most ObGyn residency programs offer limited training in management of bowel injuries, intraoperative consultation with a general surgeon may be indicated if more than a simple repair is required.8

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find multiple adhesions in the right lower quadrant, adjacent to the area of trocar insertion. Small intestine is adherent to the right lateral pelvic wall; sigmoid colon is adherent to the left pelvic wall; and the anterior fundus is adherent to the bladder peritoneal reflection, with the adhesions extending on either side to include the round ligaments.

You begin adhesiolysis in the right lower quadrant to optimize trocar movement. You transect the round ligaments in the mid-position, with dissection extended retroperitoneally on either side to the midline of the lower uterine segment; this opens access to the ascending branch of the uterine vessels. You dissect the intestine free of either pelvic sidewall along the line of demarcation.

Total blood loss is less than 25 mL. The patient is discharged 6 hours after surgery.

Dr. Giesler reports that he serves on the speaker’s bureau for Ethicon Endo-Surgery. Dr. Vyas has no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Probable adhesions. Is laparoscopy practical?

A 54-year-old woman complains of perimenopausal bleeding that has not been controlled by hormone therapy, as well as increasing pelvic pain that has caused her to miss work. She wants you to perform hysterectomy to end these problems once and for all.

Aside from these complaints, her history is unremarkable except for a laparotomy at 13 years for a ruptured appendix. Her Pap smear, endometrial biopsy, and pelvic sonogram are negative.

Is she a candidate for laparoscopic hysterectomy?

A patient such as this one, who has a history of laparotomy, is likely to have extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. This pathology increases the risk of bowel injury during surgery—whether it is performed via laparotomy or laparoscopy.

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

The ability to simplify laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has extensive adhesions requires an understanding of the ways in which adhesions form—in order to lyse them skillfully and avoid creating further adhesions. It also requires special techniques to enter the abdomen, identify the site of attachment, separate adhered structures, and conclude the hysterectomy. Attention to the type of energy that is used also is important.

In this article, we describe these techniques and considerations.

In Part 1 of this article, we discussed techniques that facilitate laparoscopic hysterectomy in a woman who has a large uterus.

Don’t overlook preoperative discussion, preparation

The patient needs to understand the risks and benefits of laparoscopic hysterectomy, particularly when extensive adhesions are likely, as well as the fact that it may be necessary to convert the procedure to laparotomy if the laparoscopic approach proves too difficult. She also needs to understand that conversion to laparotomy does not represent a failure of the procedure but an aim for greater safety.

Because bowel injury is a real risk when the patient has extensive adhesions, mechanical bowel preparation is important. Choose the regimen preferred by the colorectal surgeon likely to be consulted if intraoperative injury occurs.

The operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs also need to be prepared, and the patient should be positioned for optimal access in the OR. These and other preoperative steps are described in Part 1 of this article and remain the same for the patient who has extensive intra-abdominal adhesions.

How adhesions form

When the peritoneum is injured, a fibrinous exudate develops, causing adjacent tissues to stick together. Normal peritoneum immediately initiates a process to break down this exudate, but traumatized peritoneum has limited ability to do so. As a result, a permanent adhesion can form in as few as 5 to 8 days.1,2

Pelvic inflammatory disease and intraperitoneal blood associated with distant endometriosis implants are well known causes of abdominal adhesions; others are listed in the TABLE.

TABLE

7 causes of intra-abdominal adhesions

Instrument-traumatized tissue
Poor hemostasis
Devitalized tissue
Intraperitoneal infection
Ischemic tissue due to sutures
Foreign body reaction (carbon particles, suture)
Electrical tissue injury
Source: Ling FW, et al2

The challenge of safe entry

During laparotomy, adhesions can make it difficult to enter the abdomen. The same is true—but more so—for laparoscopic entry. The distortion caused by adhesions can lead to inadvertent injury to blood vessels, bowel, and bladder even in the best surgical hands. An attempt to lyse adhesions laparoscopically often prolongs the surgical procedure and increases the risk of visceral injury, bleeding, and fistula.1

In more than 80% of patients experiencing injury during major abdominal surgery, the injury is associated with omental adhesions to the previous abdominal wall incision, and more than 50% have intestine included in the adhesion complex.1

One study involving 918 patients who underwent laparoscopy found that 54.9% had umbilical adhesions of sufficient size to interfere with umbilical port placement.3 More important, 16% of this study group had only a single midline umbilical incision for laparoscopy before the adhesions were discovered.

The utility of Palmer’s point

Although multiple techniques have been described to minimize entry-related injury, no technique has completely eliminated the risk of inadvertent bowel or major large-vessel injury.3 In 1974, Palmer described an abdominal entry point for the Veress needle and small trocar for women who have a history of abdominal surgery.4 Many surgeons now consider “Palmer’s point,” in the left upper quadrant, as the safest peritoneal entry site.

 

 

Technique. After emptying the stomach of its contents using suction, insert the Veress needle into the peritoneal cavity at a point midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin (FIGURE). Advance it slowly until you hear three pops, signifying entry into the peritoneal cavity. Only minimal insertion is needed; insufflation pressure of less than 10 mm Hg indicates intraperitoneal placement of the needle tip.5

Once pneumoperitoneum pressure of 20 mm Hg is established, insert a 5-mm trocar perpendicular to the abdominal wall, 3 cm below the ribs, midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line.3 (There is a risk of colon injury at the splenic flexure if the entry point is further lateral.)

Inspect the abdominal cavity with the laparoscope from this access port to determine the best placement of remaining trocars under direct vision; lyse adhesions, if necessary, to perform the procedure.


FIGURE Enter the abdomen at Palmer’s point

This entry site (red dot) lies midway between the midclavicular line and the anterior axillary line, 3 cm below the costal margin. The other port sites (black dots) are described in Figure 2 in Part 1 of this article.

Success depends on careful lysis and minimal tissue injury

Adhesions in the abdomen may involve:

  • omentum to peritoneum
  • omentum to pelvic structures
  • intestine to peritoneum
  • intestine to pelvic structures.

Adhesions may be filmy and thin or dense and thick, avascular or vascular. They can be minimal, or a veritable curtain that prevents adequate visualization of the primary surgical site. When they are present, they must be managed successfully if the primary procedure is to be accomplished laparoscopically.

Successful management requires techniques to maximize adhesiolysis and minimize new adhesions or tissue injury:

  • Use traction and countertraction to define the line of attachment; this is essential to separate two tissues bound by adhesions.
  • Use atraumatic graspers to reduce the risk of tissue laceration.
  • Avoid sharp dissection with scissors. Although this is the traditional method of lysis, it is often associated with bleeding that stains and obscures the line of dissection.
  • Choose tools wisely. Electrosurgery and lasers use obliterative coagulation, working at temperatures of 150°C to 400°C to burn tissue. Blood and tissue are desiccated and oxidized, forming an eschar that covers and seals the bleeding area. Rebleeding during electrosurgery may occur when the instrument sticks to tissue and disrupts the eschar. In addition, monopolar instruments may cause undetected remote thermal injury, causing late complications.6 Both monopolar and bipolar techniques can also leave carbon particles during the oxidation process that become foci for future adhesions.7
  • Consider ultrasonic energy. Unlike electrosurgery, ultrasonic energy is mechanical and works at much lower temperatures (50°C to 100°C), controlling bleeding by coaptive coagulation. The ultrasonic blade, vibrating at 55,500 Hz, disrupts and denatures protein to form a coagulum that seals small coapted vessels. When the effect is prolonged, secondary heat seals larger vessels. Ultrasonic energy involves minimal thermal spread, minimal carbon particle formation, and a cavitation effect similar to hydrodissection that helps expose the adhesive line. It creates minimal smoke, improving visibility. Because ultrasonic energy operates at a lower temperature, less char and necrotic tissue—important causes of adhesions—occur than with bipolar or monopolar electrical energy.7

Although different energy sources interact with human tissue using different mechanisms, clinical outcomes appear to be much the same and depend more on the skill of the individual surgeon than on the power source used. Data on this topic are limited.

Thawing the frozen pelvis

Many patients have adhesions that involve omentum or intestine that can be managed using simple laparoscopic techniques, but some have organs that are fixed in the pelvis by adhesions. In these cases, traction and countertraction techniques can be tedious and may cause inadvertent injury to critical structures or excessive bleeding that necessitates conversion to laparotomy.

A better way to approach the obliterated, or “frozen,” pelvis is to open the retroperitoneal space and identify critical structures:

  • Enter the retroperitoneal space at the pelvic brim in an area free of adhesions. Identify the ureter and follow it to the bladder. This can be accomplished using hydrodissection techniques or cavitation techniques with ultrasonic energy.
  • Skeletonize, coagulate, and cut the vessels once you reach the cardinal ligament and identify the ascending uterine blood supply.
  • Dissect the structures of the obliterated cul de sac using standard techniques.
  • Use sharp dissection for adhesiolysis. Laparoscopic blunt dissection of adhesions can lead to serosal tears and inadvertent enterotomy. Sharp dissection or mechanical energy devices are preferred to divide the tissue along the line of demarcation—but remember that monopolar and bipolar devices can cause remote thermal damage that goes undetected at the time of use.
 

 

When dissection becomes unproductive in one area, switch to another; dissection planes frequently open and demonstrate the relationships between pelvic structures and loops of bowel.8

Occasionally, the visceral peritoneum of the bowel is breached during adhesiolysis. If the mucosa and muscularis remain intact, denuded serosa need not be repaired. Surgical repair is necessary if mucosa is exposed, or perforation may occur.

Because most ObGyn residency programs offer limited training in management of bowel injuries, intraoperative consultation with a general surgeon may be indicated if more than a simple repair is required.8

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find multiple adhesions in the right lower quadrant, adjacent to the area of trocar insertion. Small intestine is adherent to the right lateral pelvic wall; sigmoid colon is adherent to the left pelvic wall; and the anterior fundus is adherent to the bladder peritoneal reflection, with the adhesions extending on either side to include the round ligaments.

You begin adhesiolysis in the right lower quadrant to optimize trocar movement. You transect the round ligaments in the mid-position, with dissection extended retroperitoneally on either side to the midline of the lower uterine segment; this opens access to the ascending branch of the uterine vessels. You dissect the intestine free of either pelvic sidewall along the line of demarcation.

Total blood loss is less than 25 mL. The patient is discharged 6 hours after surgery.

References

1. Liakakos T, Thomakos N, Fine PM, Dervenis C, Young RL. Peritoneal adhesions: etiology, pathophysiology, and clinical significance. Recent advances in prevention and management. Dig Surg. 2001;18:260-273.

2. Ling FW, DeCherney AH, Diamond MP, diZerega GS, Montz FP. The Challenge of Pelvic Adhesions. Crofton, Md: Association of Professors of Gynecology and Obstetrics; 2002.

3. Agarwala N, Liu CY. Safe entry techniques during laparoscopy: left upper quadrant entry using the ninth intercostals space—a review of 918 procedures. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:55-61.

4. Palmer R. Safety in laparoscopy. J Reprod Med. 1974;13(1):1-5.

5. Childers JM, Brzechffa PR, Surwit EA. Laparoscopy using the left upper quadrant as the primary trocar site. Gynecol Oncol. 1993;50:221-225.

6. Shen CC, Wu MP, Lu CH, et al. Small intestine injury in laparoscopic-assisted vaginal hysterectomy. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2003;10:350-355.

7. Diamantis T, Kontos M, Arvelakis A, et al. Comparison of monopolar electrocoagulation, bipolar electrocoagulation, Ultracision, and Ligasure. Surg Today. 2006;36:908-913.

8. Perkins JD, Dent LL. Avoiding and repairing bowel injury in gynecologic surgery. OBG Management. 2004;16(8):15-28.

References

1. Liakakos T, Thomakos N, Fine PM, Dervenis C, Young RL. Peritoneal adhesions: etiology, pathophysiology, and clinical significance. Recent advances in prevention and management. Dig Surg. 2001;18:260-273.

2. Ling FW, DeCherney AH, Diamond MP, diZerega GS, Montz FP. The Challenge of Pelvic Adhesions. Crofton, Md: Association of Professors of Gynecology and Obstetrics; 2002.

3. Agarwala N, Liu CY. Safe entry techniques during laparoscopy: left upper quadrant entry using the ninth intercostals space—a review of 918 procedures. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:55-61.

4. Palmer R. Safety in laparoscopy. J Reprod Med. 1974;13(1):1-5.

5. Childers JM, Brzechffa PR, Surwit EA. Laparoscopy using the left upper quadrant as the primary trocar site. Gynecol Oncol. 1993;50:221-225.

6. Shen CC, Wu MP, Lu CH, et al. Small intestine injury in laparoscopic-assisted vaginal hysterectomy. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2003;10:350-355.

7. Diamantis T, Kontos M, Arvelakis A, et al. Comparison of monopolar electrocoagulation, bipolar electrocoagulation, Ultracision, and Ligasure. Surg Today. 2006;36:908-913.

8. Perkins JD, Dent LL. Avoiding and repairing bowel injury in gynecologic surgery. OBG Management. 2004;16(8):15-28.

Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Page Number
61-64
Page Number
61-64
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Challenges in total laparoscopic hysterectomy: Severe adhesions
Display Headline
Challenges in total laparoscopic hysterectomy: Severe adhesions
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas MD; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; severe adhesions; adhesions; laparoscopy; ultrasonic energy; abdominal surgery; omental adhesions; visceral peritoneum; laparotomy; bowel injury; intra-abdominal adhesions; intraperitoneal infection; Palmer’s point; pneumoperitoneum pressure; colon injury; electrosurgery; lasers; frozen pelvis
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas MD; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; severe adhesions; adhesions; laparoscopy; ultrasonic energy; abdominal surgery; omental adhesions; visceral peritoneum; laparotomy; bowel injury; intra-abdominal adhesions; intraperitoneal infection; Palmer’s point; pneumoperitoneum pressure; colon injury; electrosurgery; lasers; frozen pelvis
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article
Article PDF Media

Laparoscopic challenges: The large uterus

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 10:56
Display Headline
Laparoscopic challenges: The large uterus

The authors report no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Large fibroid uterus. Is laparoscopy feasible?

A 41-year-old woman known to have uterine fibroids consults you after two other gynecologists have recommended abdominal hysterectomy. She weighs 320 lb, stands 5 ft 2 in, and is nulliparous and sexually inactive. Pelvic ultrasonography reveals multiple fibroids approximating 18 weeks’ gestational size. Although she has hypertension and reactive airway disease, these conditions are well controlled by medication. Her Pap smear and endometrial biopsy are negative.

Because her professional commitments limit her time for recovery, she hopes to bypass abdominal hysterectomy in favor of the laparoscopic approach.

Is this desire realistic?

Twenty years have passed since Reich performed the first total laparoscopic hysterectomy,1 but only a small percentage of hysterectomies performed in the United States utilize that approach. In 2003, 12% of 602,457 hysterectomies were done laparoscopically; the rest were performed using the abdominal or vaginal approach (66% and 22%, respectively).2

Yet laparoscopic hysterectomy has much to recommend it. Compared with abdominal hysterectomy, it involves a shorter hospital stay, less blood loss, a speedier return to normal activities, and fewer wound infections.3 Unlike vaginal hysterectomy, it also facilitates intra-abdominal inspection.

Although the opening case represents potentially difficult surgery because of the size of the uterus, the laparoscopic approach is feasible. When the uterus weighs more than 450 g, contains fibroids larger than 6 cm, or exceeds 12 to 14 cm in size,4-7 there is an increased risk of visceral injury, bleeding necessitating transfusion, prolonged operative time, and conversion to laparotomy. This article describes techniques that simplify laparoscopic management when the uterus exceeds 14 weeks’ size. By incorporating these techniques, we have performed laparoscopic hysterectomy in uteri as large as 22 to 24 weeks’ size without increased complications.

In Part 2 of this article, we address techniques that simplify laparoscopy when extensive intra-abdominal adhesions are present.

Why do some surgeons avoid laparoscopy?

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

Major complications occur in approximately 5% to 6% of women who undergo total laparoscopic hysterectomy.8,9 That is one of the reasons many surgeons who perform laparoscopic procedures revert to the more traditional vaginal or abdominal approach when faced with a potentially difficult hysterectomy. These surgeons cite uteri larger than 14 weeks’ size, extensive intra-abdominal adhesions, and morbid obesity as common indications for a more conservative approach. Others cite the limitations of working with inexperienced surgeons or residents, inadequate laparoscopic instruments, and distorted pelvic anatomy. Still others avoid laparoscopy when the patient has medical problems that preclude use of pneumoperitoneum or a steep Trendelenburg position.

In some cases, laparoscopic hysterectomy is simply not practical. In others, however, such as the presence of a large uterus, it can be achieved with attention to detail, a few key techniques, and proper counseling of the patient.

Success begins preop

All surgical decisions begin with the patient. A comprehensive preoperative discussion of pertinent management options allows both patient and surgeon to proceed with confidence. Easing the patient’s preoperative anxiety is important. It can be achieved by explaining what to expect—not only the normal recovery for laparoscopic hysterectomy, but also the expected recovery if it becomes necessary to convert to laparotomy. If the patient has clear expectations, unexpected outcomes such as conversion are better tolerated. When it comes down to a choice between the surgeon’s ego or patient safety, the patient always wins. Conversion is not failure.

Another important topic to discuss with the patient is the risk of bowel injury. Mechanical bowel preparation is not essential for every patient who undergoes laparoscopic hysterectomy, but the risk of injury to the bowel necessitating colorectal surgical assistance may be heightened in women who have a large uterus or extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. Because of this risk, mechanical bowel preparation with oral polyethylene glycol solution or sodium phosphate should be considered. Most patients prefer the latter.10

 

 

What data show about bowel preps

The literature provides conflicting messages about the effectiveness of mechanical bowel preparation in averting additional complications when bowel injury occurs. Nichols and colleagues surveyed 808 active board-certified colorectal surgeons in the United States and Canada in 1995.11 All of the 471 (58%) surgeons who responded reported using some form of mechanical bowel preparation for their elective and emergency colorectal procedures.

Zmora and associates described the difficulty of designing a multicenter study to evaluate the role of mechanical bowel preparation in patient outcome.10 Of the many variables that warrant consideration, surgical technique was the single most important factor influencing surgical outcome.

In a review of evidence supporting the need for prophylactic mechanical bowel preparation prior to elective colorectal surgery, Guenaga and colleagues concluded that this practice is unsupported by the data.12

Bottom line. Given these data, the gynecologist wanting to practice evidence-based medicine should base his or her recommendations about bowel preparation on the preferences of the general or colorectal surgeon who will be called if a bowel injury occurs.

Don’t forget the team

After preparing the patient, prepare your support team—the operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs. The OR staff should ensure that extra sutures, instruments, and retractors are unopened, in the room, and available in case conversion is necessary. Inform the anesthesia staff of your anticipated surgical time and potential pitfalls. Let them know you will need maximum Trendelenburg position for pelvic exposure, but remain flexible if the patient has trouble with oxygenation and ventilation. Making your anesthesiologist aware of your willingness to work together will benefit both you and your patient immensely.

Preparation continues in the OR

Appropriate patient positioning is key to successful completion of difficult laparoscopic cases. Position the patient’s buttocks several inches beyond the table break to facilitate maximal uterine manipulation, which may be needed for completion of the colpotomy.

Place the patient in the dorsal lithotomy position using Allen stirrups, with the knees flexed at a 90° angle. Keep the knees level with the hips and the hips extended neutrally.

Arm position is important to maximize room for the surgeon alongside the OR table. Space is limited when the patient’s arms are positioned on arm boards. Tucking the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, improves the surgical field and secures the patient to the OR table (FIGURE 1). Protect the elbows and hands with cushions.

Place sequential compression devices (on the calf or foot) for the duration of the procedure to minimize the risk of blood stasis and clots that sometimes develop in the legs with prolonged surgical times. Many complex laparoscopic cases last longer than 2 hours.


FIGURE 1 Positioning the patient

Tuck the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, to improve the surgical field.

Maximum Trendelenburg position is a must

This positioning is essential for successful anatomic exposure in complex laparoscopic surgical cases. If the patient is positioned securely, maximum Trendelenburg position does not increase the risk of the patient sliding off the OR table, nor does it affect oxygenation in most morbidly obese patients. Rather, it allows the intestines to drop out of the pelvis into the upper abdomen, facilitating visualization and decreasing the risk of bowel injury.

Anesthesia staffers often limit the degree of Trendelenburg position unless the surgeon insists otherwise. Alternating patient position between maximum Trendelenburg for optimal surgical exposure and a less steep angle when patient oxygenation requires it allows the gynecologic surgeon and anesthesiologist to work together in the patient’s best interest.

Video monitor placement is key

It helps determine how efficiently you operate. Use of a single central monitor requires both the surgeon and assistant to turn their heads acutely during prolonged procedures, accelerating their fatigue and potentially increasing the risk of injury. Using two monitors—each placed to allow the surgeon and assistant to maintain neutral head position—minimizes fatigue and its attendant risks.

Entering the abdomen

Abdominal entry poses theoretical obstacles when the patient has a large uterus, but all types of entry remain safe as long as laparoscopic surgical principles are followed scrupulously. We have successfully used traditional Veress needle entry, open laparoscopic entry, and left upper quadrant entry.

Is entry above the umbilicus helpful?

Anecdotal reports suggest a midline port above the umbilicus when the uterus extends above the umbilicus, but we do not alter standard port placement in these cases. By tenting the abdominal wall at the umbilicus, we create adequate distance to achieve pneumoperitoneum and space for directed trocar entry to avoid injury to the uterus. The conventional umbilical primary port allows use of standard-length instruments. The cephalad uterine blood supply (infundibulopelvic ligament vessels or utero-ovarian ligament vessels) remains at or below the level of the umbilicus in almost all of these patients.

 

 

Placement of ports

Port placement in the patient who has a large uterus is the same as it is for other laparoscopic hysterectomies in our practice. We use an 11-mm trocar at the umbilicus for a 10-mm endoscope. We use the 10-mm endoscope because the light it provides to the surgical field is superior to that of a 5-mm endoscope, and the 10-mm scope is more durable.

We place a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side, lateral to the ascending inferior epigastric vessels (FIGURE 2). We place an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port on the side of the primary surgeon. This trocar serves a dual purpose: It is the primary port for the surgeon, and removal of the trocar sleeve later in the procedure allows for easy insertion of the morcellator.

Some patients will require a fifth port on the side opposite the primary surgeon to allow better access to the uterine blood supply or to facilitate uterine manipulation.


FIGURE 2 Port placement when the uterus is large

A midline umbilical port (A) is possible even when the uterus is large. Other ports include a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side (B), and an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port nearest the primary surgeon (C).

Why an angled scope is superior

Many gynecologists fear laparoscopic surgery in patients who have a large uterus. The reason? Poor visualization of the surgical field. However, the type of endoscope that is used has a bearing on visualization.

Most gynecologists are trained to use a 0° endoscope for laparoscopic surgery. However, when the uterus is large, the 0° scope yields an inadequate field of view, whether the endoscope is placed at the umbilicus or through a lateral port. Critical structures like the vascular bundles, ureters, and even the bladder may be inadequately visualized using the 0° endoscope (FIGURE 3).

Gynecologists routinely use angled scopes in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy, but tend to avoid them in laparoscopy because of difficulty orienting the surgical field. As gynecologists, we readily accept that use of an angled scope in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy requires rotation of the scope while the camera maintains its horizontal position. The same concept applies to laparoscopy.

Use of the angled scope in the abdomen is a two-step process. First, it must be rotated to achieve the desired field of view. Then, as the endoscope is held firmly to maintain this view, the camera head must be rotated on the scope to return the field to a horizontal position.

Many surgeons find this action difficult because they or the assistant are holding the camera in one hand and an instrument in the other. We solve this problem by using a mechanical scope holder to secure the camera and endoscope in the position we desire.

In some cases, the camera head does not attach securely to the eyepiece, and the scope rotates on the camera as soon as it is released. This difficulty arises when the eyepiece of the endoscope is slightly smaller than the camera attachment. The problem is easily solved by placing a small piece of surgical skin closure tape on one edge of the eyepiece, slightly increasing its diameter. The camera attachment then holds the scope securely.

Human scope holders may tire during long cases, causing field drift at critical moments. In contrast, a mechanical scope holder is easily and intermittently adjusted for field of view, producing a steady field of view and minimizing the impact of manual manipulation of the scope on surgical outcome. It also allows the surgeon and first assistant to use two hands while operating.

The 45° scope is best

General surgeons and urologists often use 30° endoscopes. Gynecologists working in the pelvis see better using a 45° scope (FIGURE 3). Most ORs offer a 30° endoscope but do not always have a 45° endoscope available in the instrument room. This is regrettable. Compared with the 30° scope, the 45° instrument provides better visual access to the low lateral uterine blood supply and bladder flap, particularly when the patient has a globular uterus or large, low anterior fibroid. We include both 5-mm and 10-mm 45° endoscopes in our laparoscopic tool chest, and believe they are essential options.


FIGURE 3 The 45° laparoscope provides better visual access

(A) 0° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view obstructed. (B) 0° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view still obstructed. (C) 45° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view improved. (D) 45° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view optimal.

 

 

Control the blood supply

Our laparoscopic approach is very similar to our technique for abdominal hysterectomy, beginning with the blood supply. The main blood supply to the uterus enters at only four points. If this blood supply is adequately controlled, morcellation of the large uterus can proceed without excessive blood loss.

Visualization of the blood supply is normally restricted because of tense, taut round ligaments that limit mobility of the large uterus. A simple step to improve mobility is to transect each round ligament in its middle position before addressing the uterine blood supply.

If the ovaries are being conserved, transect the utero-ovarian ligament and tube as close to the ovary as possible with your instrument and technique of choice (electrical or mechanical energy, etc); they all work. Stay close to the ovary to avert bleeding that might otherwise occur when the ascending uterine vascular coils are cut tangentially.

If the ovaries are being removed, transect the infundibulopelvic ligament close to the ovary, being careful not to include ovarian tissue in the pedicle. Use your method of choice, but relieve tension on the pedicle as it is being transected to minimize the risk of pedicle bleeding.

Now, 20% to 40% of the uterine blood supply is controlled, with minimal blood loss.

The key to controlling the remaining blood supply is transecting the ascending vascular bundle as low as possible on either side. The 45° endoscope provides optimal visualization for this part of the procedure. Many times the field of view attained using the 45° endoscope is all that is necessary to facilitate occlusion and transection of these vessels at the level of the internal cervical os.

We commonly use ultrasonic energy to coagulate and cut the ascending vascular bundle. Ultrasonic energy provides excellent hemostasis for this part of the procedure. Again, use the technique of your choice.

Use a laparoscopic “leash”

At times, large broad-ligament fibroids obscure the field of view and access to the ascending vascular bundle. Standard laparoscopic graspers cannot maintain a firm hold on the tissue to improve visibility or access. The solution? A laparoscopic “leash,” first described in 1999 by Tsin and colleagues.13

Giesler extended that concept with a “puppet string” variation to maximize exposure in difficult cases. To apply the “puppet string” technique, using No. 1 Prolene suture, place a large figure-of-eight suture through the tissue to be retracted (FIGURE 4). Bring the suture out of the abdomen adjacent to the trocar sleeve in a location that provides optimal traction. (First, bring the suture through the trocar sleeve. Then remove the trocar sleeve and reinsert it adjacent to the retraction suture.) This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. It also is possible to manipulate this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers to provide reliable repositioning of the uterus. This degree of tissue control improves field of vision and allows the procedure to advance smoothly.


FIGURE 4 A “puppet string” improves access

This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. Manipulation of this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers also helps reposition the uterus.

Morcellation techniques

Once the ascending blood supply has been managed on both sides, morcellation can be performed with minimal blood loss using one of two techniques:

  • Amputate the body of the uterus above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted
  • Morcellate the uterine body to a point just above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted.

Use basic principles, regardless of the technique chosen

  • Hold the morcellator in one hand and a toothed grasper in the other hand to pull tissue into the morcellator. Do not push the morcellator into tissue or you may injure nonvisualized structures on the other side.
  • Morcellate tissue in half-moon portions, skimming along the top of the fundus, instead of coring the uterus like an apple; it creates longer strips of tissue and is faster. This technique also allows continuous observation of the active blade, which helps avoid inadvertent injury to tissues behind the blade.
  • Attempt morcellation in the anterior abdominal space to avoid injury to blood vessels, ureters, and bowel in the posterior abdominal space. The assistant feeds uterine tissue to the surgeon in the anterior space.

It is essential to control the blood supply to the tissue to be morcellated before morcellation to avoid massive hemorrhage.

Amputating the upper uterine body

Amputation of the large body of the uterus from the lower uterine segment assures complete control of the blood supply and avoids further blood loss during morcellation, but it also poses difficulties. The free uterine mass is held in position by the assistant using only one grasper. If this grasper slips, the mass can be inadvertently released while the morcellator blade is active. If the assistant is also holding the camera, there are no options for stabilizing the free uterine mass. If a mechanical scope holder or second assistant is available to hold the camera, a second trocar port can be placed on the side of the assistant to provide access for a second grasper to stabilize the uterine body during morcellation. The need for a stable uterine mass is important to minimize the risk of injury.

 

 

Once the upper body of the uterus has been removed by morcellation, the lower uterine segment and cervix must be removed—using your procedure of choice—to finish the hysterectomy.

Morcellating the upper uterine body

If the uterus remains attached to the cervix, it already has one fixed point of stability. During morcellation, the assistant has one hand available to direct the camera. Blood loss during morcellation of the uterus while it is still attached to the cervix is minimal because the ascending vascular bundles on either side have been interrupted under direct vision.

For greater control of the large uterus, a second port can be placed on the assistant’s side for a second grasper, as described above. Most of the large uterus that is still connected to the cervix can be morcellated in the anterior abdominal space in horizontal fashion, as for the free uterine mass just described.

Uterine manipulation by the assistant keeps the uterus away from critical structures as it is reduced to 8 to 10 weeks’ size. Once this size is attained, resume normal technique for total laparoscopic hysterectomy to separate the remaining tissue from the vagina.

2 types of morcellators in use today

One has a disposable 15-mm blade that attaches to a drive unit adjacent to the OR table (Gynecare-Ethicon Women’s Health and Urology). The other has a sterile, reusable drive unit with a disposable blade (Storz). Both work well on large uteri.

The reusable drive unit has more power to morcellate calcified fibroids and offers a choice between 12-mm, 15-mm, and 20-mm disposable blades for faster morcellation.

Concluding the procedure

Chips of fibroid and uterine tissue created during morcellation often remain in the pelvis after the uterus has been removed. Place them in a 10-cm specimen-collection bag and extract it through the vagina after removal of the residual uterus and cervix. This is faster and easier than recovering them one at a time with the gall bladder stone scoop through a trocar port. The value of the OR time saved with use of the specimen-collection bag is significantly greater than that of the disposable collection device.

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find 6-cm fibroids in both broad ligament areas and over the cervical–vaginal junction on the left. You use a “puppet string” to apply directed traction to the fibroids to simplify their extraction. The 45° endoscope allows clear visualization of the ascending vascular bundle on both sides, and the mechanical scope holder allows a fixed field of view for the meticulous dissection required to remove the broad-ligament fibroids.

You morcellate the entire 663-g uterus and remove it in pieces through the abdominal wall. The extensive morcellation required, coupled with technical issues related to the patient’s morbid obesity, prolong the procedure to more than 4 hours.

Postoperatively, the patient voids without a catheter, walks around the nursing unit, and eats half a sandwich within 4 hours. She is discharged home in less than 24 hours and is able to drive 4 days after her surgery.

References

1. Reich H, DeCaprio J, McGlynn F. Laparoscopic hysterectomy. J Gynecol Surg. 1989;5:213-216.

2. Wu JM, Wechter ME, Geller EJ, Nguyen TV, Visco AG. Hysterectomy rates in the United States, 2003. Obstet Gynecol. 2007;110:1091-1095.

3. Johnson N, Barlow D, Lethaby A, Tavender E, Curr E, Garry R. Surgical approach to hysterectomy for benign gynaecological disease. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD003677.-

4. Leonard F, Chopin N, Borghese B, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy: preoperative risk factors for conversion to laparotomy. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:312-317.

5. Fiaccavento A, Landi S, Barbieri F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy in cases of very large uteri: a retrospective comparative study. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2007;14:559-563.

6. Pelosi MA, Kadar N. Laparoscopically assisted hysterectomy for uteri weighing 500 g or more. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 1994;1:405-409.

7. Seracchioli R, Venturoli S, Vianello F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy compared with abdominal hysterectomy in the presence of a large uterus. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2002;9:333-338.

8. Hoffman CP, Kennedy J, Borschel L, Burchette R, Kidd A. Laparoscopic hysterectomy: the Kaiser Permanente San Diego experience. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:16-24.

9. Liu CY, Reich H. Complications of total laparoscopic hysterectomy in 518 cases. Gynaecol Endosc. 1994;3:203-208.

10. Zmora O, Pikarsky AJ, Wexner SD. Bowel preparation for colorectal surgery. Dis Colon Rectum. 2001;44:1537-1547.

11. Nichols RI, Smith JW, Girch RY, Waterman RS, Holmes JWC. Current practices of preoperative bowel preparation among North American colorectal surgeons. Clin Infect Dis. 1997;24:609-619.

12. Guenaga KF, Matos D, Castro AA, Atallah AN, Wille-Jørgensen P. Mechanical bowel preparation for elective colorectal surgery. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD001544.-

13. Tsin DA, Colombero LT. Laparoscopic leash: a simple technique to prevent specimen loss during operative laparoscopy. Obstet Gynecol. 1999;94:628-629.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Publications
Page Number
46-58
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas;MD; laparoscopy; large uterus; uterus; surgical; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; uterine fibroids; abdominal hysterectomy; bowel injury; bowel preparation; mechanical bowel preparation; Trendelenburg; Trendelenburg position; umbilicus; endoscope; angled scope; hysteroscopy; cystoscopy; broad ligament; laparoscopic leash; puppet string; morcellation; uterine blood supply; ultrasonic energy; hemostasis; bleeding
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Author and Disclosure Information

Carl F. Giesler, MD
Dr. Giesler is Associate Professor and Director of Minimally Invasive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston

Anuja Vyas, MD
Dr. Vyas is Instructor of Obstetrics and Gynecology at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston.

Article PDF
Article PDF

The authors report no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Large fibroid uterus. Is laparoscopy feasible?

A 41-year-old woman known to have uterine fibroids consults you after two other gynecologists have recommended abdominal hysterectomy. She weighs 320 lb, stands 5 ft 2 in, and is nulliparous and sexually inactive. Pelvic ultrasonography reveals multiple fibroids approximating 18 weeks’ gestational size. Although she has hypertension and reactive airway disease, these conditions are well controlled by medication. Her Pap smear and endometrial biopsy are negative.

Because her professional commitments limit her time for recovery, she hopes to bypass abdominal hysterectomy in favor of the laparoscopic approach.

Is this desire realistic?

Twenty years have passed since Reich performed the first total laparoscopic hysterectomy,1 but only a small percentage of hysterectomies performed in the United States utilize that approach. In 2003, 12% of 602,457 hysterectomies were done laparoscopically; the rest were performed using the abdominal or vaginal approach (66% and 22%, respectively).2

Yet laparoscopic hysterectomy has much to recommend it. Compared with abdominal hysterectomy, it involves a shorter hospital stay, less blood loss, a speedier return to normal activities, and fewer wound infections.3 Unlike vaginal hysterectomy, it also facilitates intra-abdominal inspection.

Although the opening case represents potentially difficult surgery because of the size of the uterus, the laparoscopic approach is feasible. When the uterus weighs more than 450 g, contains fibroids larger than 6 cm, or exceeds 12 to 14 cm in size,4-7 there is an increased risk of visceral injury, bleeding necessitating transfusion, prolonged operative time, and conversion to laparotomy. This article describes techniques that simplify laparoscopic management when the uterus exceeds 14 weeks’ size. By incorporating these techniques, we have performed laparoscopic hysterectomy in uteri as large as 22 to 24 weeks’ size without increased complications.

In Part 2 of this article, we address techniques that simplify laparoscopy when extensive intra-abdominal adhesions are present.

Why do some surgeons avoid laparoscopy?

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

Major complications occur in approximately 5% to 6% of women who undergo total laparoscopic hysterectomy.8,9 That is one of the reasons many surgeons who perform laparoscopic procedures revert to the more traditional vaginal or abdominal approach when faced with a potentially difficult hysterectomy. These surgeons cite uteri larger than 14 weeks’ size, extensive intra-abdominal adhesions, and morbid obesity as common indications for a more conservative approach. Others cite the limitations of working with inexperienced surgeons or residents, inadequate laparoscopic instruments, and distorted pelvic anatomy. Still others avoid laparoscopy when the patient has medical problems that preclude use of pneumoperitoneum or a steep Trendelenburg position.

In some cases, laparoscopic hysterectomy is simply not practical. In others, however, such as the presence of a large uterus, it can be achieved with attention to detail, a few key techniques, and proper counseling of the patient.

Success begins preop

All surgical decisions begin with the patient. A comprehensive preoperative discussion of pertinent management options allows both patient and surgeon to proceed with confidence. Easing the patient’s preoperative anxiety is important. It can be achieved by explaining what to expect—not only the normal recovery for laparoscopic hysterectomy, but also the expected recovery if it becomes necessary to convert to laparotomy. If the patient has clear expectations, unexpected outcomes such as conversion are better tolerated. When it comes down to a choice between the surgeon’s ego or patient safety, the patient always wins. Conversion is not failure.

Another important topic to discuss with the patient is the risk of bowel injury. Mechanical bowel preparation is not essential for every patient who undergoes laparoscopic hysterectomy, but the risk of injury to the bowel necessitating colorectal surgical assistance may be heightened in women who have a large uterus or extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. Because of this risk, mechanical bowel preparation with oral polyethylene glycol solution or sodium phosphate should be considered. Most patients prefer the latter.10

 

 

What data show about bowel preps

The literature provides conflicting messages about the effectiveness of mechanical bowel preparation in averting additional complications when bowel injury occurs. Nichols and colleagues surveyed 808 active board-certified colorectal surgeons in the United States and Canada in 1995.11 All of the 471 (58%) surgeons who responded reported using some form of mechanical bowel preparation for their elective and emergency colorectal procedures.

Zmora and associates described the difficulty of designing a multicenter study to evaluate the role of mechanical bowel preparation in patient outcome.10 Of the many variables that warrant consideration, surgical technique was the single most important factor influencing surgical outcome.

In a review of evidence supporting the need for prophylactic mechanical bowel preparation prior to elective colorectal surgery, Guenaga and colleagues concluded that this practice is unsupported by the data.12

Bottom line. Given these data, the gynecologist wanting to practice evidence-based medicine should base his or her recommendations about bowel preparation on the preferences of the general or colorectal surgeon who will be called if a bowel injury occurs.

Don’t forget the team

After preparing the patient, prepare your support team—the operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs. The OR staff should ensure that extra sutures, instruments, and retractors are unopened, in the room, and available in case conversion is necessary. Inform the anesthesia staff of your anticipated surgical time and potential pitfalls. Let them know you will need maximum Trendelenburg position for pelvic exposure, but remain flexible if the patient has trouble with oxygenation and ventilation. Making your anesthesiologist aware of your willingness to work together will benefit both you and your patient immensely.

Preparation continues in the OR

Appropriate patient positioning is key to successful completion of difficult laparoscopic cases. Position the patient’s buttocks several inches beyond the table break to facilitate maximal uterine manipulation, which may be needed for completion of the colpotomy.

Place the patient in the dorsal lithotomy position using Allen stirrups, with the knees flexed at a 90° angle. Keep the knees level with the hips and the hips extended neutrally.

Arm position is important to maximize room for the surgeon alongside the OR table. Space is limited when the patient’s arms are positioned on arm boards. Tucking the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, improves the surgical field and secures the patient to the OR table (FIGURE 1). Protect the elbows and hands with cushions.

Place sequential compression devices (on the calf or foot) for the duration of the procedure to minimize the risk of blood stasis and clots that sometimes develop in the legs with prolonged surgical times. Many complex laparoscopic cases last longer than 2 hours.


FIGURE 1 Positioning the patient

Tuck the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, to improve the surgical field.

Maximum Trendelenburg position is a must

This positioning is essential for successful anatomic exposure in complex laparoscopic surgical cases. If the patient is positioned securely, maximum Trendelenburg position does not increase the risk of the patient sliding off the OR table, nor does it affect oxygenation in most morbidly obese patients. Rather, it allows the intestines to drop out of the pelvis into the upper abdomen, facilitating visualization and decreasing the risk of bowel injury.

Anesthesia staffers often limit the degree of Trendelenburg position unless the surgeon insists otherwise. Alternating patient position between maximum Trendelenburg for optimal surgical exposure and a less steep angle when patient oxygenation requires it allows the gynecologic surgeon and anesthesiologist to work together in the patient’s best interest.

Video monitor placement is key

It helps determine how efficiently you operate. Use of a single central monitor requires both the surgeon and assistant to turn their heads acutely during prolonged procedures, accelerating their fatigue and potentially increasing the risk of injury. Using two monitors—each placed to allow the surgeon and assistant to maintain neutral head position—minimizes fatigue and its attendant risks.

Entering the abdomen

Abdominal entry poses theoretical obstacles when the patient has a large uterus, but all types of entry remain safe as long as laparoscopic surgical principles are followed scrupulously. We have successfully used traditional Veress needle entry, open laparoscopic entry, and left upper quadrant entry.

Is entry above the umbilicus helpful?

Anecdotal reports suggest a midline port above the umbilicus when the uterus extends above the umbilicus, but we do not alter standard port placement in these cases. By tenting the abdominal wall at the umbilicus, we create adequate distance to achieve pneumoperitoneum and space for directed trocar entry to avoid injury to the uterus. The conventional umbilical primary port allows use of standard-length instruments. The cephalad uterine blood supply (infundibulopelvic ligament vessels or utero-ovarian ligament vessels) remains at or below the level of the umbilicus in almost all of these patients.

 

 

Placement of ports

Port placement in the patient who has a large uterus is the same as it is for other laparoscopic hysterectomies in our practice. We use an 11-mm trocar at the umbilicus for a 10-mm endoscope. We use the 10-mm endoscope because the light it provides to the surgical field is superior to that of a 5-mm endoscope, and the 10-mm scope is more durable.

We place a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side, lateral to the ascending inferior epigastric vessels (FIGURE 2). We place an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port on the side of the primary surgeon. This trocar serves a dual purpose: It is the primary port for the surgeon, and removal of the trocar sleeve later in the procedure allows for easy insertion of the morcellator.

Some patients will require a fifth port on the side opposite the primary surgeon to allow better access to the uterine blood supply or to facilitate uterine manipulation.


FIGURE 2 Port placement when the uterus is large

A midline umbilical port (A) is possible even when the uterus is large. Other ports include a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side (B), and an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port nearest the primary surgeon (C).

Why an angled scope is superior

Many gynecologists fear laparoscopic surgery in patients who have a large uterus. The reason? Poor visualization of the surgical field. However, the type of endoscope that is used has a bearing on visualization.

Most gynecologists are trained to use a 0° endoscope for laparoscopic surgery. However, when the uterus is large, the 0° scope yields an inadequate field of view, whether the endoscope is placed at the umbilicus or through a lateral port. Critical structures like the vascular bundles, ureters, and even the bladder may be inadequately visualized using the 0° endoscope (FIGURE 3).

Gynecologists routinely use angled scopes in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy, but tend to avoid them in laparoscopy because of difficulty orienting the surgical field. As gynecologists, we readily accept that use of an angled scope in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy requires rotation of the scope while the camera maintains its horizontal position. The same concept applies to laparoscopy.

Use of the angled scope in the abdomen is a two-step process. First, it must be rotated to achieve the desired field of view. Then, as the endoscope is held firmly to maintain this view, the camera head must be rotated on the scope to return the field to a horizontal position.

Many surgeons find this action difficult because they or the assistant are holding the camera in one hand and an instrument in the other. We solve this problem by using a mechanical scope holder to secure the camera and endoscope in the position we desire.

In some cases, the camera head does not attach securely to the eyepiece, and the scope rotates on the camera as soon as it is released. This difficulty arises when the eyepiece of the endoscope is slightly smaller than the camera attachment. The problem is easily solved by placing a small piece of surgical skin closure tape on one edge of the eyepiece, slightly increasing its diameter. The camera attachment then holds the scope securely.

Human scope holders may tire during long cases, causing field drift at critical moments. In contrast, a mechanical scope holder is easily and intermittently adjusted for field of view, producing a steady field of view and minimizing the impact of manual manipulation of the scope on surgical outcome. It also allows the surgeon and first assistant to use two hands while operating.

The 45° scope is best

General surgeons and urologists often use 30° endoscopes. Gynecologists working in the pelvis see better using a 45° scope (FIGURE 3). Most ORs offer a 30° endoscope but do not always have a 45° endoscope available in the instrument room. This is regrettable. Compared with the 30° scope, the 45° instrument provides better visual access to the low lateral uterine blood supply and bladder flap, particularly when the patient has a globular uterus or large, low anterior fibroid. We include both 5-mm and 10-mm 45° endoscopes in our laparoscopic tool chest, and believe they are essential options.


FIGURE 3 The 45° laparoscope provides better visual access

(A) 0° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view obstructed. (B) 0° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view still obstructed. (C) 45° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view improved. (D) 45° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view optimal.

 

 

Control the blood supply

Our laparoscopic approach is very similar to our technique for abdominal hysterectomy, beginning with the blood supply. The main blood supply to the uterus enters at only four points. If this blood supply is adequately controlled, morcellation of the large uterus can proceed without excessive blood loss.

Visualization of the blood supply is normally restricted because of tense, taut round ligaments that limit mobility of the large uterus. A simple step to improve mobility is to transect each round ligament in its middle position before addressing the uterine blood supply.

If the ovaries are being conserved, transect the utero-ovarian ligament and tube as close to the ovary as possible with your instrument and technique of choice (electrical or mechanical energy, etc); they all work. Stay close to the ovary to avert bleeding that might otherwise occur when the ascending uterine vascular coils are cut tangentially.

If the ovaries are being removed, transect the infundibulopelvic ligament close to the ovary, being careful not to include ovarian tissue in the pedicle. Use your method of choice, but relieve tension on the pedicle as it is being transected to minimize the risk of pedicle bleeding.

Now, 20% to 40% of the uterine blood supply is controlled, with minimal blood loss.

The key to controlling the remaining blood supply is transecting the ascending vascular bundle as low as possible on either side. The 45° endoscope provides optimal visualization for this part of the procedure. Many times the field of view attained using the 45° endoscope is all that is necessary to facilitate occlusion and transection of these vessels at the level of the internal cervical os.

We commonly use ultrasonic energy to coagulate and cut the ascending vascular bundle. Ultrasonic energy provides excellent hemostasis for this part of the procedure. Again, use the technique of your choice.

Use a laparoscopic “leash”

At times, large broad-ligament fibroids obscure the field of view and access to the ascending vascular bundle. Standard laparoscopic graspers cannot maintain a firm hold on the tissue to improve visibility or access. The solution? A laparoscopic “leash,” first described in 1999 by Tsin and colleagues.13

Giesler extended that concept with a “puppet string” variation to maximize exposure in difficult cases. To apply the “puppet string” technique, using No. 1 Prolene suture, place a large figure-of-eight suture through the tissue to be retracted (FIGURE 4). Bring the suture out of the abdomen adjacent to the trocar sleeve in a location that provides optimal traction. (First, bring the suture through the trocar sleeve. Then remove the trocar sleeve and reinsert it adjacent to the retraction suture.) This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. It also is possible to manipulate this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers to provide reliable repositioning of the uterus. This degree of tissue control improves field of vision and allows the procedure to advance smoothly.


FIGURE 4 A “puppet string” improves access

This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. Manipulation of this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers also helps reposition the uterus.

Morcellation techniques

Once the ascending blood supply has been managed on both sides, morcellation can be performed with minimal blood loss using one of two techniques:

  • Amputate the body of the uterus above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted
  • Morcellate the uterine body to a point just above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted.

Use basic principles, regardless of the technique chosen

  • Hold the morcellator in one hand and a toothed grasper in the other hand to pull tissue into the morcellator. Do not push the morcellator into tissue or you may injure nonvisualized structures on the other side.
  • Morcellate tissue in half-moon portions, skimming along the top of the fundus, instead of coring the uterus like an apple; it creates longer strips of tissue and is faster. This technique also allows continuous observation of the active blade, which helps avoid inadvertent injury to tissues behind the blade.
  • Attempt morcellation in the anterior abdominal space to avoid injury to blood vessels, ureters, and bowel in the posterior abdominal space. The assistant feeds uterine tissue to the surgeon in the anterior space.

It is essential to control the blood supply to the tissue to be morcellated before morcellation to avoid massive hemorrhage.

Amputating the upper uterine body

Amputation of the large body of the uterus from the lower uterine segment assures complete control of the blood supply and avoids further blood loss during morcellation, but it also poses difficulties. The free uterine mass is held in position by the assistant using only one grasper. If this grasper slips, the mass can be inadvertently released while the morcellator blade is active. If the assistant is also holding the camera, there are no options for stabilizing the free uterine mass. If a mechanical scope holder or second assistant is available to hold the camera, a second trocar port can be placed on the side of the assistant to provide access for a second grasper to stabilize the uterine body during morcellation. The need for a stable uterine mass is important to minimize the risk of injury.

 

 

Once the upper body of the uterus has been removed by morcellation, the lower uterine segment and cervix must be removed—using your procedure of choice—to finish the hysterectomy.

Morcellating the upper uterine body

If the uterus remains attached to the cervix, it already has one fixed point of stability. During morcellation, the assistant has one hand available to direct the camera. Blood loss during morcellation of the uterus while it is still attached to the cervix is minimal because the ascending vascular bundles on either side have been interrupted under direct vision.

For greater control of the large uterus, a second port can be placed on the assistant’s side for a second grasper, as described above. Most of the large uterus that is still connected to the cervix can be morcellated in the anterior abdominal space in horizontal fashion, as for the free uterine mass just described.

Uterine manipulation by the assistant keeps the uterus away from critical structures as it is reduced to 8 to 10 weeks’ size. Once this size is attained, resume normal technique for total laparoscopic hysterectomy to separate the remaining tissue from the vagina.

2 types of morcellators in use today

One has a disposable 15-mm blade that attaches to a drive unit adjacent to the OR table (Gynecare-Ethicon Women’s Health and Urology). The other has a sterile, reusable drive unit with a disposable blade (Storz). Both work well on large uteri.

The reusable drive unit has more power to morcellate calcified fibroids and offers a choice between 12-mm, 15-mm, and 20-mm disposable blades for faster morcellation.

Concluding the procedure

Chips of fibroid and uterine tissue created during morcellation often remain in the pelvis after the uterus has been removed. Place them in a 10-cm specimen-collection bag and extract it through the vagina after removal of the residual uterus and cervix. This is faster and easier than recovering them one at a time with the gall bladder stone scoop through a trocar port. The value of the OR time saved with use of the specimen-collection bag is significantly greater than that of the disposable collection device.

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find 6-cm fibroids in both broad ligament areas and over the cervical–vaginal junction on the left. You use a “puppet string” to apply directed traction to the fibroids to simplify their extraction. The 45° endoscope allows clear visualization of the ascending vascular bundle on both sides, and the mechanical scope holder allows a fixed field of view for the meticulous dissection required to remove the broad-ligament fibroids.

You morcellate the entire 663-g uterus and remove it in pieces through the abdominal wall. The extensive morcellation required, coupled with technical issues related to the patient’s morbid obesity, prolong the procedure to more than 4 hours.

Postoperatively, the patient voids without a catheter, walks around the nursing unit, and eats half a sandwich within 4 hours. She is discharged home in less than 24 hours and is able to drive 4 days after her surgery.

The authors report no financial relationships relevant to this article.

CASE: Large fibroid uterus. Is laparoscopy feasible?

A 41-year-old woman known to have uterine fibroids consults you after two other gynecologists have recommended abdominal hysterectomy. She weighs 320 lb, stands 5 ft 2 in, and is nulliparous and sexually inactive. Pelvic ultrasonography reveals multiple fibroids approximating 18 weeks’ gestational size. Although she has hypertension and reactive airway disease, these conditions are well controlled by medication. Her Pap smear and endometrial biopsy are negative.

Because her professional commitments limit her time for recovery, she hopes to bypass abdominal hysterectomy in favor of the laparoscopic approach.

Is this desire realistic?

Twenty years have passed since Reich performed the first total laparoscopic hysterectomy,1 but only a small percentage of hysterectomies performed in the United States utilize that approach. In 2003, 12% of 602,457 hysterectomies were done laparoscopically; the rest were performed using the abdominal or vaginal approach (66% and 22%, respectively).2

Yet laparoscopic hysterectomy has much to recommend it. Compared with abdominal hysterectomy, it involves a shorter hospital stay, less blood loss, a speedier return to normal activities, and fewer wound infections.3 Unlike vaginal hysterectomy, it also facilitates intra-abdominal inspection.

Although the opening case represents potentially difficult surgery because of the size of the uterus, the laparoscopic approach is feasible. When the uterus weighs more than 450 g, contains fibroids larger than 6 cm, or exceeds 12 to 14 cm in size,4-7 there is an increased risk of visceral injury, bleeding necessitating transfusion, prolonged operative time, and conversion to laparotomy. This article describes techniques that simplify laparoscopic management when the uterus exceeds 14 weeks’ size. By incorporating these techniques, we have performed laparoscopic hysterectomy in uteri as large as 22 to 24 weeks’ size without increased complications.

In Part 2 of this article, we address techniques that simplify laparoscopy when extensive intra-abdominal adhesions are present.

Why do some surgeons avoid laparoscopy?

Do you agree with the author?

Tell us what you think!

Click here to submit a letter to the editor

Major complications occur in approximately 5% to 6% of women who undergo total laparoscopic hysterectomy.8,9 That is one of the reasons many surgeons who perform laparoscopic procedures revert to the more traditional vaginal or abdominal approach when faced with a potentially difficult hysterectomy. These surgeons cite uteri larger than 14 weeks’ size, extensive intra-abdominal adhesions, and morbid obesity as common indications for a more conservative approach. Others cite the limitations of working with inexperienced surgeons or residents, inadequate laparoscopic instruments, and distorted pelvic anatomy. Still others avoid laparoscopy when the patient has medical problems that preclude use of pneumoperitoneum or a steep Trendelenburg position.

In some cases, laparoscopic hysterectomy is simply not practical. In others, however, such as the presence of a large uterus, it can be achieved with attention to detail, a few key techniques, and proper counseling of the patient.

Success begins preop

All surgical decisions begin with the patient. A comprehensive preoperative discussion of pertinent management options allows both patient and surgeon to proceed with confidence. Easing the patient’s preoperative anxiety is important. It can be achieved by explaining what to expect—not only the normal recovery for laparoscopic hysterectomy, but also the expected recovery if it becomes necessary to convert to laparotomy. If the patient has clear expectations, unexpected outcomes such as conversion are better tolerated. When it comes down to a choice between the surgeon’s ego or patient safety, the patient always wins. Conversion is not failure.

Another important topic to discuss with the patient is the risk of bowel injury. Mechanical bowel preparation is not essential for every patient who undergoes laparoscopic hysterectomy, but the risk of injury to the bowel necessitating colorectal surgical assistance may be heightened in women who have a large uterus or extensive intra-abdominal adhesions. Because of this risk, mechanical bowel preparation with oral polyethylene glycol solution or sodium phosphate should be considered. Most patients prefer the latter.10

 

 

What data show about bowel preps

The literature provides conflicting messages about the effectiveness of mechanical bowel preparation in averting additional complications when bowel injury occurs. Nichols and colleagues surveyed 808 active board-certified colorectal surgeons in the United States and Canada in 1995.11 All of the 471 (58%) surgeons who responded reported using some form of mechanical bowel preparation for their elective and emergency colorectal procedures.

Zmora and associates described the difficulty of designing a multicenter study to evaluate the role of mechanical bowel preparation in patient outcome.10 Of the many variables that warrant consideration, surgical technique was the single most important factor influencing surgical outcome.

In a review of evidence supporting the need for prophylactic mechanical bowel preparation prior to elective colorectal surgery, Guenaga and colleagues concluded that this practice is unsupported by the data.12

Bottom line. Given these data, the gynecologist wanting to practice evidence-based medicine should base his or her recommendations about bowel preparation on the preferences of the general or colorectal surgeon who will be called if a bowel injury occurs.

Don’t forget the team

After preparing the patient, prepare your support team—the operating room (OR) and anesthesia staffs. The OR staff should ensure that extra sutures, instruments, and retractors are unopened, in the room, and available in case conversion is necessary. Inform the anesthesia staff of your anticipated surgical time and potential pitfalls. Let them know you will need maximum Trendelenburg position for pelvic exposure, but remain flexible if the patient has trouble with oxygenation and ventilation. Making your anesthesiologist aware of your willingness to work together will benefit both you and your patient immensely.

Preparation continues in the OR

Appropriate patient positioning is key to successful completion of difficult laparoscopic cases. Position the patient’s buttocks several inches beyond the table break to facilitate maximal uterine manipulation, which may be needed for completion of the colpotomy.

Place the patient in the dorsal lithotomy position using Allen stirrups, with the knees flexed at a 90° angle. Keep the knees level with the hips and the hips extended neutrally.

Arm position is important to maximize room for the surgeon alongside the OR table. Space is limited when the patient’s arms are positioned on arm boards. Tucking the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, improves the surgical field and secures the patient to the OR table (FIGURE 1). Protect the elbows and hands with cushions.

Place sequential compression devices (on the calf or foot) for the duration of the procedure to minimize the risk of blood stasis and clots that sometimes develop in the legs with prolonged surgical times. Many complex laparoscopic cases last longer than 2 hours.


FIGURE 1 Positioning the patient

Tuck the arms at the patient’s sides, with the antecubital fossa anterior and the palm cupping the hip, to improve the surgical field.

Maximum Trendelenburg position is a must

This positioning is essential for successful anatomic exposure in complex laparoscopic surgical cases. If the patient is positioned securely, maximum Trendelenburg position does not increase the risk of the patient sliding off the OR table, nor does it affect oxygenation in most morbidly obese patients. Rather, it allows the intestines to drop out of the pelvis into the upper abdomen, facilitating visualization and decreasing the risk of bowel injury.

Anesthesia staffers often limit the degree of Trendelenburg position unless the surgeon insists otherwise. Alternating patient position between maximum Trendelenburg for optimal surgical exposure and a less steep angle when patient oxygenation requires it allows the gynecologic surgeon and anesthesiologist to work together in the patient’s best interest.

Video monitor placement is key

It helps determine how efficiently you operate. Use of a single central monitor requires both the surgeon and assistant to turn their heads acutely during prolonged procedures, accelerating their fatigue and potentially increasing the risk of injury. Using two monitors—each placed to allow the surgeon and assistant to maintain neutral head position—minimizes fatigue and its attendant risks.

Entering the abdomen

Abdominal entry poses theoretical obstacles when the patient has a large uterus, but all types of entry remain safe as long as laparoscopic surgical principles are followed scrupulously. We have successfully used traditional Veress needle entry, open laparoscopic entry, and left upper quadrant entry.

Is entry above the umbilicus helpful?

Anecdotal reports suggest a midline port above the umbilicus when the uterus extends above the umbilicus, but we do not alter standard port placement in these cases. By tenting the abdominal wall at the umbilicus, we create adequate distance to achieve pneumoperitoneum and space for directed trocar entry to avoid injury to the uterus. The conventional umbilical primary port allows use of standard-length instruments. The cephalad uterine blood supply (infundibulopelvic ligament vessels or utero-ovarian ligament vessels) remains at or below the level of the umbilicus in almost all of these patients.

 

 

Placement of ports

Port placement in the patient who has a large uterus is the same as it is for other laparoscopic hysterectomies in our practice. We use an 11-mm trocar at the umbilicus for a 10-mm endoscope. We use the 10-mm endoscope because the light it provides to the surgical field is superior to that of a 5-mm endoscope, and the 10-mm scope is more durable.

We place a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side, lateral to the ascending inferior epigastric vessels (FIGURE 2). We place an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port on the side of the primary surgeon. This trocar serves a dual purpose: It is the primary port for the surgeon, and removal of the trocar sleeve later in the procedure allows for easy insertion of the morcellator.

Some patients will require a fifth port on the side opposite the primary surgeon to allow better access to the uterine blood supply or to facilitate uterine manipulation.


FIGURE 2 Port placement when the uterus is large

A midline umbilical port (A) is possible even when the uterus is large. Other ports include a 5-mm trocar just above the anterior iliac crest on each side (B), and an 11-mm trocar 10 cm medial and cephalad to the lower iliac crest port nearest the primary surgeon (C).

Why an angled scope is superior

Many gynecologists fear laparoscopic surgery in patients who have a large uterus. The reason? Poor visualization of the surgical field. However, the type of endoscope that is used has a bearing on visualization.

Most gynecologists are trained to use a 0° endoscope for laparoscopic surgery. However, when the uterus is large, the 0° scope yields an inadequate field of view, whether the endoscope is placed at the umbilicus or through a lateral port. Critical structures like the vascular bundles, ureters, and even the bladder may be inadequately visualized using the 0° endoscope (FIGURE 3).

Gynecologists routinely use angled scopes in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy, but tend to avoid them in laparoscopy because of difficulty orienting the surgical field. As gynecologists, we readily accept that use of an angled scope in hysteroscopy and cystoscopy requires rotation of the scope while the camera maintains its horizontal position. The same concept applies to laparoscopy.

Use of the angled scope in the abdomen is a two-step process. First, it must be rotated to achieve the desired field of view. Then, as the endoscope is held firmly to maintain this view, the camera head must be rotated on the scope to return the field to a horizontal position.

Many surgeons find this action difficult because they or the assistant are holding the camera in one hand and an instrument in the other. We solve this problem by using a mechanical scope holder to secure the camera and endoscope in the position we desire.

In some cases, the camera head does not attach securely to the eyepiece, and the scope rotates on the camera as soon as it is released. This difficulty arises when the eyepiece of the endoscope is slightly smaller than the camera attachment. The problem is easily solved by placing a small piece of surgical skin closure tape on one edge of the eyepiece, slightly increasing its diameter. The camera attachment then holds the scope securely.

Human scope holders may tire during long cases, causing field drift at critical moments. In contrast, a mechanical scope holder is easily and intermittently adjusted for field of view, producing a steady field of view and minimizing the impact of manual manipulation of the scope on surgical outcome. It also allows the surgeon and first assistant to use two hands while operating.

The 45° scope is best

General surgeons and urologists often use 30° endoscopes. Gynecologists working in the pelvis see better using a 45° scope (FIGURE 3). Most ORs offer a 30° endoscope but do not always have a 45° endoscope available in the instrument room. This is regrettable. Compared with the 30° scope, the 45° instrument provides better visual access to the low lateral uterine blood supply and bladder flap, particularly when the patient has a globular uterus or large, low anterior fibroid. We include both 5-mm and 10-mm 45° endoscopes in our laparoscopic tool chest, and believe they are essential options.


FIGURE 3 The 45° laparoscope provides better visual access

(A) 0° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view obstructed. (B) 0° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view still obstructed. (C) 45° scope, uterus midline: Right broad ligament view improved. (D) 45° scope, uterus to left: Right broad ligament view optimal.

 

 

Control the blood supply

Our laparoscopic approach is very similar to our technique for abdominal hysterectomy, beginning with the blood supply. The main blood supply to the uterus enters at only four points. If this blood supply is adequately controlled, morcellation of the large uterus can proceed without excessive blood loss.

Visualization of the blood supply is normally restricted because of tense, taut round ligaments that limit mobility of the large uterus. A simple step to improve mobility is to transect each round ligament in its middle position before addressing the uterine blood supply.

If the ovaries are being conserved, transect the utero-ovarian ligament and tube as close to the ovary as possible with your instrument and technique of choice (electrical or mechanical energy, etc); they all work. Stay close to the ovary to avert bleeding that might otherwise occur when the ascending uterine vascular coils are cut tangentially.

If the ovaries are being removed, transect the infundibulopelvic ligament close to the ovary, being careful not to include ovarian tissue in the pedicle. Use your method of choice, but relieve tension on the pedicle as it is being transected to minimize the risk of pedicle bleeding.

Now, 20% to 40% of the uterine blood supply is controlled, with minimal blood loss.

The key to controlling the remaining blood supply is transecting the ascending vascular bundle as low as possible on either side. The 45° endoscope provides optimal visualization for this part of the procedure. Many times the field of view attained using the 45° endoscope is all that is necessary to facilitate occlusion and transection of these vessels at the level of the internal cervical os.

We commonly use ultrasonic energy to coagulate and cut the ascending vascular bundle. Ultrasonic energy provides excellent hemostasis for this part of the procedure. Again, use the technique of your choice.

Use a laparoscopic “leash”

At times, large broad-ligament fibroids obscure the field of view and access to the ascending vascular bundle. Standard laparoscopic graspers cannot maintain a firm hold on the tissue to improve visibility or access. The solution? A laparoscopic “leash,” first described in 1999 by Tsin and colleagues.13

Giesler extended that concept with a “puppet string” variation to maximize exposure in difficult cases. To apply the “puppet string” technique, using No. 1 Prolene suture, place a large figure-of-eight suture through the tissue to be retracted (FIGURE 4). Bring the suture out of the abdomen adjacent to the trocar sleeve in a location that provides optimal traction. (First, bring the suture through the trocar sleeve. Then remove the trocar sleeve and reinsert it adjacent to the retraction suture.) This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. It also is possible to manipulate this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers to provide reliable repositioning of the uterus. This degree of tissue control improves field of vision and allows the procedure to advance smoothly.


FIGURE 4 A “puppet string” improves access

This secure attachment allows better visualization and greater access to the blood supply at a lower level. Manipulation of this suture inside the abdomen using traditional graspers also helps reposition the uterus.

Morcellation techniques

Once the ascending blood supply has been managed on both sides, morcellation can be performed with minimal blood loss using one of two techniques:

  • Amputate the body of the uterus above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted
  • Morcellate the uterine body to a point just above the level where the blood supply has been interrupted.

Use basic principles, regardless of the technique chosen

  • Hold the morcellator in one hand and a toothed grasper in the other hand to pull tissue into the morcellator. Do not push the morcellator into tissue or you may injure nonvisualized structures on the other side.
  • Morcellate tissue in half-moon portions, skimming along the top of the fundus, instead of coring the uterus like an apple; it creates longer strips of tissue and is faster. This technique also allows continuous observation of the active blade, which helps avoid inadvertent injury to tissues behind the blade.
  • Attempt morcellation in the anterior abdominal space to avoid injury to blood vessels, ureters, and bowel in the posterior abdominal space. The assistant feeds uterine tissue to the surgeon in the anterior space.

It is essential to control the blood supply to the tissue to be morcellated before morcellation to avoid massive hemorrhage.

Amputating the upper uterine body

Amputation of the large body of the uterus from the lower uterine segment assures complete control of the blood supply and avoids further blood loss during morcellation, but it also poses difficulties. The free uterine mass is held in position by the assistant using only one grasper. If this grasper slips, the mass can be inadvertently released while the morcellator blade is active. If the assistant is also holding the camera, there are no options for stabilizing the free uterine mass. If a mechanical scope holder or second assistant is available to hold the camera, a second trocar port can be placed on the side of the assistant to provide access for a second grasper to stabilize the uterine body during morcellation. The need for a stable uterine mass is important to minimize the risk of injury.

 

 

Once the upper body of the uterus has been removed by morcellation, the lower uterine segment and cervix must be removed—using your procedure of choice—to finish the hysterectomy.

Morcellating the upper uterine body

If the uterus remains attached to the cervix, it already has one fixed point of stability. During morcellation, the assistant has one hand available to direct the camera. Blood loss during morcellation of the uterus while it is still attached to the cervix is minimal because the ascending vascular bundles on either side have been interrupted under direct vision.

For greater control of the large uterus, a second port can be placed on the assistant’s side for a second grasper, as described above. Most of the large uterus that is still connected to the cervix can be morcellated in the anterior abdominal space in horizontal fashion, as for the free uterine mass just described.

Uterine manipulation by the assistant keeps the uterus away from critical structures as it is reduced to 8 to 10 weeks’ size. Once this size is attained, resume normal technique for total laparoscopic hysterectomy to separate the remaining tissue from the vagina.

2 types of morcellators in use today

One has a disposable 15-mm blade that attaches to a drive unit adjacent to the OR table (Gynecare-Ethicon Women’s Health and Urology). The other has a sterile, reusable drive unit with a disposable blade (Storz). Both work well on large uteri.

The reusable drive unit has more power to morcellate calcified fibroids and offers a choice between 12-mm, 15-mm, and 20-mm disposable blades for faster morcellation.

Concluding the procedure

Chips of fibroid and uterine tissue created during morcellation often remain in the pelvis after the uterus has been removed. Place them in a 10-cm specimen-collection bag and extract it through the vagina after removal of the residual uterus and cervix. This is faster and easier than recovering them one at a time with the gall bladder stone scoop through a trocar port. The value of the OR time saved with use of the specimen-collection bag is significantly greater than that of the disposable collection device.

CASE RESOLVED

You perform total laparoscopic hysterectomy and find 6-cm fibroids in both broad ligament areas and over the cervical–vaginal junction on the left. You use a “puppet string” to apply directed traction to the fibroids to simplify their extraction. The 45° endoscope allows clear visualization of the ascending vascular bundle on both sides, and the mechanical scope holder allows a fixed field of view for the meticulous dissection required to remove the broad-ligament fibroids.

You morcellate the entire 663-g uterus and remove it in pieces through the abdominal wall. The extensive morcellation required, coupled with technical issues related to the patient’s morbid obesity, prolong the procedure to more than 4 hours.

Postoperatively, the patient voids without a catheter, walks around the nursing unit, and eats half a sandwich within 4 hours. She is discharged home in less than 24 hours and is able to drive 4 days after her surgery.

References

1. Reich H, DeCaprio J, McGlynn F. Laparoscopic hysterectomy. J Gynecol Surg. 1989;5:213-216.

2. Wu JM, Wechter ME, Geller EJ, Nguyen TV, Visco AG. Hysterectomy rates in the United States, 2003. Obstet Gynecol. 2007;110:1091-1095.

3. Johnson N, Barlow D, Lethaby A, Tavender E, Curr E, Garry R. Surgical approach to hysterectomy for benign gynaecological disease. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD003677.-

4. Leonard F, Chopin N, Borghese B, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy: preoperative risk factors for conversion to laparotomy. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:312-317.

5. Fiaccavento A, Landi S, Barbieri F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy in cases of very large uteri: a retrospective comparative study. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2007;14:559-563.

6. Pelosi MA, Kadar N. Laparoscopically assisted hysterectomy for uteri weighing 500 g or more. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 1994;1:405-409.

7. Seracchioli R, Venturoli S, Vianello F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy compared with abdominal hysterectomy in the presence of a large uterus. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2002;9:333-338.

8. Hoffman CP, Kennedy J, Borschel L, Burchette R, Kidd A. Laparoscopic hysterectomy: the Kaiser Permanente San Diego experience. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:16-24.

9. Liu CY, Reich H. Complications of total laparoscopic hysterectomy in 518 cases. Gynaecol Endosc. 1994;3:203-208.

10. Zmora O, Pikarsky AJ, Wexner SD. Bowel preparation for colorectal surgery. Dis Colon Rectum. 2001;44:1537-1547.

11. Nichols RI, Smith JW, Girch RY, Waterman RS, Holmes JWC. Current practices of preoperative bowel preparation among North American colorectal surgeons. Clin Infect Dis. 1997;24:609-619.

12. Guenaga KF, Matos D, Castro AA, Atallah AN, Wille-Jørgensen P. Mechanical bowel preparation for elective colorectal surgery. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD001544.-

13. Tsin DA, Colombero LT. Laparoscopic leash: a simple technique to prevent specimen loss during operative laparoscopy. Obstet Gynecol. 1999;94:628-629.

References

1. Reich H, DeCaprio J, McGlynn F. Laparoscopic hysterectomy. J Gynecol Surg. 1989;5:213-216.

2. Wu JM, Wechter ME, Geller EJ, Nguyen TV, Visco AG. Hysterectomy rates in the United States, 2003. Obstet Gynecol. 2007;110:1091-1095.

3. Johnson N, Barlow D, Lethaby A, Tavender E, Curr E, Garry R. Surgical approach to hysterectomy for benign gynaecological disease. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD003677.-

4. Leonard F, Chopin N, Borghese B, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy: preoperative risk factors for conversion to laparotomy. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:312-317.

5. Fiaccavento A, Landi S, Barbieri F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy in cases of very large uteri: a retrospective comparative study. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2007;14:559-563.

6. Pelosi MA, Kadar N. Laparoscopically assisted hysterectomy for uteri weighing 500 g or more. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 1994;1:405-409.

7. Seracchioli R, Venturoli S, Vianello F, et al. Total laparoscopic hysterectomy compared with abdominal hysterectomy in the presence of a large uterus. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc. 2002;9:333-338.

8. Hoffman CP, Kennedy J, Borschel L, Burchette R, Kidd A. Laparoscopic hysterectomy: the Kaiser Permanente San Diego experience. J Minim Invasive Gynecol. 2005;12:16-24.

9. Liu CY, Reich H. Complications of total laparoscopic hysterectomy in 518 cases. Gynaecol Endosc. 1994;3:203-208.

10. Zmora O, Pikarsky AJ, Wexner SD. Bowel preparation for colorectal surgery. Dis Colon Rectum. 2001;44:1537-1547.

11. Nichols RI, Smith JW, Girch RY, Waterman RS, Holmes JWC. Current practices of preoperative bowel preparation among North American colorectal surgeons. Clin Infect Dis. 1997;24:609-619.

12. Guenaga KF, Matos D, Castro AA, Atallah AN, Wille-Jørgensen P. Mechanical bowel preparation for elective colorectal surgery. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2005 Jan 25;(1):CD001544.-

13. Tsin DA, Colombero LT. Laparoscopic leash: a simple technique to prevent specimen loss during operative laparoscopy. Obstet Gynecol. 1999;94:628-629.

Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Page Number
46-58
Page Number
46-58
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Laparoscopic challenges: The large uterus
Display Headline
Laparoscopic challenges: The large uterus
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas;MD; laparoscopy; large uterus; uterus; surgical; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; uterine fibroids; abdominal hysterectomy; bowel injury; bowel preparation; mechanical bowel preparation; Trendelenburg; Trendelenburg position; umbilicus; endoscope; angled scope; hysteroscopy; cystoscopy; broad ligament; laparoscopic leash; puppet string; morcellation; uterine blood supply; ultrasonic energy; hemostasis; bleeding
Legacy Keywords
Carl F. Giesler MD; Anuja Vyas;MD; laparoscopy; large uterus; uterus; surgical; total laparoscopic hysterectomy; TLH; laparoscopic hysterectomy; hysterectomy; uterine fibroids; abdominal hysterectomy; bowel injury; bowel preparation; mechanical bowel preparation; Trendelenburg; Trendelenburg position; umbilicus; endoscope; angled scope; hysteroscopy; cystoscopy; broad ligament; laparoscopic leash; puppet string; morcellation; uterine blood supply; ultrasonic energy; hemostasis; bleeding
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article
Article PDF Media

June 2008 Instant Poll Results

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 10:56
Display Headline
June 2008 Instant Poll Results

WHAT IS THE C-SECTION RATE AT YOUR HOSPITAL?

At my hospital, the overall cesarean delivery rate is:



…and I think that this rate is:

Article PDF
Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Publications
Page Number
16
Legacy Keywords
Instant Poll Results; cesarean delivery rate; C-section rate; C-section; cesarean delivery; hospital
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

WHAT IS THE C-SECTION RATE AT YOUR HOSPITAL?

At my hospital, the overall cesarean delivery rate is:



…and I think that this rate is:

WHAT IS THE C-SECTION RATE AT YOUR HOSPITAL?

At my hospital, the overall cesarean delivery rate is:



…and I think that this rate is:

Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Issue
OBG Management - 20(10)
Page Number
16
Page Number
16
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
June 2008 Instant Poll Results
Display Headline
June 2008 Instant Poll Results
Legacy Keywords
Instant Poll Results; cesarean delivery rate; C-section rate; C-section; cesarean delivery; hospital
Legacy Keywords
Instant Poll Results; cesarean delivery rate; C-section rate; C-section; cesarean delivery; hospital
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Article PDF Media

Going outside your area of expertise: How far is too far?

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 04/16/2018 - 14:22
Display Headline
Going outside your area of expertise: How far is too far?

Dear Dr. Mossman:

I am an adult psychiatrist practicing in a geographically isolated area. I am working with the family of 10-year-old “Bobby” who is struggling with attention problems. Top notch neuropsychologic testing recommends a stimulant trial, but the local pediatrician is too busy to give Bobby adequate follow-up and attention.

I am an experienced psychopharmacologist but have not prescribed medication to children since residency. My relationship with the family is excellent, and the local pediatrician said that she would supervise me. If I choose to treat Bobby, what are the possible liability issues I should be aware of, and how can I address them?—Submitted by “Dr. F”

Dr. F’s question raises issues that come up whenever patients need treatment for conditions outside the few with which you are highly familiar. Although you can’t be an expert on every aspect of every patient’s treatment, psychiatrists shouldn’t practice outside their area of competence.

Thus, the main liability-related issue that Dr. F should ask herself is, “Can I treat Bobby competently?” Of course, whenever you decide to treat any patient, you should be able to answer “yes” to this question. When thinking about potential liability related to treating Bobby, Dr. F might also ask, “If a lawsuit occurred, how would my treatment of Bobby appear?” This article discusses key issues that arise when general psychiatrists treat children and the steps general psychiatrists can take to show that they are practicing prudently.

Problem: Not enough clinicians

Child and adolescent psychiatrists (CAPs) are in short supply.1,2 In 2001 the United States had 8.67 CAPs per 100,000 youths and 1.6 CAPs for every 1,000 youths with severe mental disorders.1 Studies suggest that the United States needs nearly twice that many CAPs.3 The shortage is especially severe in rural areas, but approximately one-half of metropolitan counties with populations of >250,000 have no CAPs.1 In much of the nation, finding CAPs who are accepting new patients is difficult, and child and adolescent psychiatric treatment often is delivered by pediatricians, family practitioners, psychiatric nurse practitioners, and general adult psychiatrists.

DO YOU HAVE A QUESTION ABOUT POSSIBLE LIABILITY?

  • Submit your malpractice-related questions to Dr. Mossman at [email protected].
  • Include your name, address, and practice location. If your question is chosen for publication, your name can be withheld by request.
  • All readers who submit questions will be included in quarterly drawings for a $50 gift certificate for Professional Risk Management Services, Inc’s online marketplace of risk management publications and resources (www.prms.com).

Children’s special medical issues

General psychiatrists know that children aren’t just little adults. CAPs develop skills and thinking styles during their 2 years of subspecialty fellowship training that are quite different from those used by their general psychiatric colleagues.

Communication. Children and adolescents who need psychiatric care often have limited verbal abilities. Working and communicating with these patients requires a different interactive style.

Information sources. CAPs learn to seek and assimilate clinically important information from many settings—especially a child’s home—where their patients interact with others.

Caution. Only a small subset of psychotropic medications that adult psychiatrists prescribe are FDA-approved for use in children (Table 1).4 Because we don’t know how psychotropic drugs affect brain development, CAPs sometimes are leery of giving kids the same medications that adult psychiatrists readily prescribe.

Table 1

FDA-approved drugs and dosages for ADHD in children and adults

Brand nameGeneric nameDrug classDosing forms (mg)Dosage rangeAge range
AdderallAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineIR stimulant5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 305 to 40 mg3 to 18 years
Adderall XRAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineER stimulant5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 305 to 30 mg3 years to adult
ConcertaMethylphenidateER stimulant18, 27, 36, 5418 to 72 mg6 years to adult
DaytranaMethylphenidate transdermalStimulant10, 15, 20, 30 (patch)10 to 30 mg6 to 18 years
FocalinDexmethylphenidateIR stimulant2.5, 5, 102.5 to 10 mg bid6 to 17 years
Focalin XRDexmethylphenidateER stimulant5, 10, 15, 205 to 20 mg6 years to adult
Metadate CDMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 50, 6010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
RitalinMethylphenidateIR stimulant5, 10, 205 to 20 mg bid or tid6 to 18 years
Ritalin LAMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 4010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
StratteraAtomoxetineSNRI10, 18, 25, 40, 60, 80, 10010 to 100 mg6 years to adult
VyvanseLisdexamfetamine dimesylateER stimulant (precursor)30, 50, 7030 to 70 mg6 years to adult
LA: long acting; CD: controlled delivery; ER, XR: extended release; IR: immediate release; SNRI: selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
Source: Adapted from references 2,3

Different drugs. Some medications commonly taken by children are not often prescribed for adults, although this is changing as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is better recognized in adults.5,6

 

 

Dosages. Dosing psychotropics in adults is fairly standardized, but in children and adolescents dosages vary with age, body weight, and physical maturity.

Adverse effects. The side effects kids experience and the way they report them can differ markedly from adults and will vary with age and developmental maturity. Some issues related to monitoring children—such as appropriate cardiac screening before starting stimulants—are controversial and remain unsettled.7,8

Consider alternatives

Dr. F may be tempted to treat Bobby because of her preexisting, positive relationship with the child’s family and a laudable desire to help. But Dr. F needs to ask, “Is there really no other workable alternative for Bobby?” Some possibilities include:

  • Refer Bobby to a CAP in another community for initiation of treatment. Dr. F or Bobby’s pediatrician might safely continue care once a CAP establishes an effective treatment regimen.
  • Find another pediatrician who might have more time to provide the follow-up that Dr. F feels is necessary.
  • Decline to treat Bobby. Before doing this, Dr. F should consider what effect this refusal might have on her relationship with the family and the consequences for Bobby if his problems go untreated.
  • Consult a CAP from another community, describing the situation and clinical factors in detail without naming or identifying the patient, and then ask, “Is this really the best thing to do?”

From a liability standpoint, this last point may be crucial. If the CAP answers “yes,” Dr. F can document the alternatives she has considered and her consultation and discussion with the CAP colleague as evidence of prudent practice. Dr. F can also document any advice that she has received and her plans to follow it.

If you choose to treat

Presumably, Dr. F would not perform thoracic surgery or provide any treatment that is far outside a general psychiatrist’s competence except under the most dire circumstances. General psychiatrists receive child psychiatry training during residency, and treating children is within their scope of practice. Similarly, most elderly patients are treated by general psychiatrists, rather than graduates of geropsychiatry fellowships. Prescribing medication for Bobby is not grossly different from Dr. F’s other duties, and she might provide services that a pediatrician might not.

Ask yourself 4 questions to determine if you are competent to provide medical treatment outside your usual area of expertise (Table 2). In Bobby’s case, Dr. F can consider these additional questions:

  • Am I comfortable doing this? Would I be comfortable with this scenario if Bobby were my child?
  • How extensive was my general residency training in child psychiatry?
  • How long ago was my last CAP experience?
  • Have I treated ADHD in adults, and am I familiar with stimulant medications?
  • What kind of supervision could I arrange, such as regular phone consultation with a CAP or pediatrician?
  • How helpful are other information sources, such as recent texts, journals, and medical Web sites?
  • What is my relationship with the family, and how would treating Bobby affect it?

Table 2

Should you provide treatment? 4 questions to ask yourself

How sure am I that I know what I don’t know?
How will I know when I should ask for help?
Do I have colleagues readily available for consultation if I need help?
Do I have a good track record for seeking consultation when I need it?

Advantages and benefits

So far, we’ve emphasized cautions, but Dr. F also should remember that she may offer patients services that general psychiatrists provide but that pediatricians might not do routinely. Among the possibilities:

  • Performing a diagnostic assessment that incorporates biopsychosocial factors.
  • Taking time to foster a strong doctor-patient relationship with the family.
  • Reserving time for medication-related psychoeducation.
  • Scheduling longer visits to discuss a child’s psychiatric problems and explore solutions.
  • Utilizing knowledge of and existing relationships with nonphysician therapists who could provide additional psychotherapy.
References

1. Thomas CR, Holzer CE, III. The continuing shortage of child and adolescent psychiatrists. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2006;45:1023-31.

2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Mental health: a report of the Surgeon General. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health; 1999. Available at: http://www.surgeongeneral.gov/library/mentalhealth/home.html. Accessed August 20, 2008.

3. Levin A. Rural counties suffer from child psychiatry shortage. Psychiatr News 2006;42(14):4-41.

4. National Institute of Mental Health. Treatment of children with mental disorders. 2004. Available at: http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/childqa.cfm. Accessed August 2, 2008.

5. Wilens TE, Biederman J, Spencer TJ. Attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder across the lifespan. Annu Rev Med 2002;53:113-31.

6. Greenhill LL, Pliszka S, Dulcan MK, et al. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameter for the use of stimulant medications in the treatment of children, adolescents, and adults. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry. 2002;41(2 suppl):26S-49S.

7. Perrin JM, Friedman RA, Knilans TK. Cardiovascular monitoring and stimulant drugs for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Pediatrics 2008;122:451-3.

8. Vetter VL, Elia J, Erickson C, et al. Cardiovascular monitoring of children and adolescents with heart disease receiving medications for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder: A scientific statement from the American Heart Association Council on Cardiovascular Disease in the Young Congenital Cardiac Defects Committee and the Council on Cardiovascular Nursing. Circulation 2008;117:2407-23.

Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information


Douglas Mossman, MD
Christina G. Weston, MD
Dr. Mossman is director, Glenn M. Weaver Institute of Law and Psychiatry, University of Cincinnati College of Law, and volunteer professor of psychiatry and associate program director, Institute for Psychiatry and Law, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine. Dr. Weston is assistant professor and associate director, division of child and adolescent psychiatry, Wright State University Boonshoft School of Medicine, Dayton, OH.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Publications
Page Number
53-56
Legacy Keywords
Douglas Mossman; pediatric psychiatry; liability;
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information


Douglas Mossman, MD
Christina G. Weston, MD
Dr. Mossman is director, Glenn M. Weaver Institute of Law and Psychiatry, University of Cincinnati College of Law, and volunteer professor of psychiatry and associate program director, Institute for Psychiatry and Law, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine. Dr. Weston is assistant professor and associate director, division of child and adolescent psychiatry, Wright State University Boonshoft School of Medicine, Dayton, OH.

Author and Disclosure Information


Douglas Mossman, MD
Christina G. Weston, MD
Dr. Mossman is director, Glenn M. Weaver Institute of Law and Psychiatry, University of Cincinnati College of Law, and volunteer professor of psychiatry and associate program director, Institute for Psychiatry and Law, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine. Dr. Weston is assistant professor and associate director, division of child and adolescent psychiatry, Wright State University Boonshoft School of Medicine, Dayton, OH.

Article PDF
Article PDF

Dear Dr. Mossman:

I am an adult psychiatrist practicing in a geographically isolated area. I am working with the family of 10-year-old “Bobby” who is struggling with attention problems. Top notch neuropsychologic testing recommends a stimulant trial, but the local pediatrician is too busy to give Bobby adequate follow-up and attention.

I am an experienced psychopharmacologist but have not prescribed medication to children since residency. My relationship with the family is excellent, and the local pediatrician said that she would supervise me. If I choose to treat Bobby, what are the possible liability issues I should be aware of, and how can I address them?—Submitted by “Dr. F”

Dr. F’s question raises issues that come up whenever patients need treatment for conditions outside the few with which you are highly familiar. Although you can’t be an expert on every aspect of every patient’s treatment, psychiatrists shouldn’t practice outside their area of competence.

Thus, the main liability-related issue that Dr. F should ask herself is, “Can I treat Bobby competently?” Of course, whenever you decide to treat any patient, you should be able to answer “yes” to this question. When thinking about potential liability related to treating Bobby, Dr. F might also ask, “If a lawsuit occurred, how would my treatment of Bobby appear?” This article discusses key issues that arise when general psychiatrists treat children and the steps general psychiatrists can take to show that they are practicing prudently.

Problem: Not enough clinicians

Child and adolescent psychiatrists (CAPs) are in short supply.1,2 In 2001 the United States had 8.67 CAPs per 100,000 youths and 1.6 CAPs for every 1,000 youths with severe mental disorders.1 Studies suggest that the United States needs nearly twice that many CAPs.3 The shortage is especially severe in rural areas, but approximately one-half of metropolitan counties with populations of >250,000 have no CAPs.1 In much of the nation, finding CAPs who are accepting new patients is difficult, and child and adolescent psychiatric treatment often is delivered by pediatricians, family practitioners, psychiatric nurse practitioners, and general adult psychiatrists.

DO YOU HAVE A QUESTION ABOUT POSSIBLE LIABILITY?

  • Submit your malpractice-related questions to Dr. Mossman at [email protected].
  • Include your name, address, and practice location. If your question is chosen for publication, your name can be withheld by request.
  • All readers who submit questions will be included in quarterly drawings for a $50 gift certificate for Professional Risk Management Services, Inc’s online marketplace of risk management publications and resources (www.prms.com).

Children’s special medical issues

General psychiatrists know that children aren’t just little adults. CAPs develop skills and thinking styles during their 2 years of subspecialty fellowship training that are quite different from those used by their general psychiatric colleagues.

Communication. Children and adolescents who need psychiatric care often have limited verbal abilities. Working and communicating with these patients requires a different interactive style.

Information sources. CAPs learn to seek and assimilate clinically important information from many settings—especially a child’s home—where their patients interact with others.

Caution. Only a small subset of psychotropic medications that adult psychiatrists prescribe are FDA-approved for use in children (Table 1).4 Because we don’t know how psychotropic drugs affect brain development, CAPs sometimes are leery of giving kids the same medications that adult psychiatrists readily prescribe.

Table 1

FDA-approved drugs and dosages for ADHD in children and adults

Brand nameGeneric nameDrug classDosing forms (mg)Dosage rangeAge range
AdderallAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineIR stimulant5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 305 to 40 mg3 to 18 years
Adderall XRAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineER stimulant5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 305 to 30 mg3 years to adult
ConcertaMethylphenidateER stimulant18, 27, 36, 5418 to 72 mg6 years to adult
DaytranaMethylphenidate transdermalStimulant10, 15, 20, 30 (patch)10 to 30 mg6 to 18 years
FocalinDexmethylphenidateIR stimulant2.5, 5, 102.5 to 10 mg bid6 to 17 years
Focalin XRDexmethylphenidateER stimulant5, 10, 15, 205 to 20 mg6 years to adult
Metadate CDMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 50, 6010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
RitalinMethylphenidateIR stimulant5, 10, 205 to 20 mg bid or tid6 to 18 years
Ritalin LAMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 4010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
StratteraAtomoxetineSNRI10, 18, 25, 40, 60, 80, 10010 to 100 mg6 years to adult
VyvanseLisdexamfetamine dimesylateER stimulant (precursor)30, 50, 7030 to 70 mg6 years to adult
LA: long acting; CD: controlled delivery; ER, XR: extended release; IR: immediate release; SNRI: selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
Source: Adapted from references 2,3

Different drugs. Some medications commonly taken by children are not often prescribed for adults, although this is changing as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is better recognized in adults.5,6

 

 

Dosages. Dosing psychotropics in adults is fairly standardized, but in children and adolescents dosages vary with age, body weight, and physical maturity.

Adverse effects. The side effects kids experience and the way they report them can differ markedly from adults and will vary with age and developmental maturity. Some issues related to monitoring children—such as appropriate cardiac screening before starting stimulants—are controversial and remain unsettled.7,8

Consider alternatives

Dr. F may be tempted to treat Bobby because of her preexisting, positive relationship with the child’s family and a laudable desire to help. But Dr. F needs to ask, “Is there really no other workable alternative for Bobby?” Some possibilities include:

  • Refer Bobby to a CAP in another community for initiation of treatment. Dr. F or Bobby’s pediatrician might safely continue care once a CAP establishes an effective treatment regimen.
  • Find another pediatrician who might have more time to provide the follow-up that Dr. F feels is necessary.
  • Decline to treat Bobby. Before doing this, Dr. F should consider what effect this refusal might have on her relationship with the family and the consequences for Bobby if his problems go untreated.
  • Consult a CAP from another community, describing the situation and clinical factors in detail without naming or identifying the patient, and then ask, “Is this really the best thing to do?”

From a liability standpoint, this last point may be crucial. If the CAP answers “yes,” Dr. F can document the alternatives she has considered and her consultation and discussion with the CAP colleague as evidence of prudent practice. Dr. F can also document any advice that she has received and her plans to follow it.

If you choose to treat

Presumably, Dr. F would not perform thoracic surgery or provide any treatment that is far outside a general psychiatrist’s competence except under the most dire circumstances. General psychiatrists receive child psychiatry training during residency, and treating children is within their scope of practice. Similarly, most elderly patients are treated by general psychiatrists, rather than graduates of geropsychiatry fellowships. Prescribing medication for Bobby is not grossly different from Dr. F’s other duties, and she might provide services that a pediatrician might not.

Ask yourself 4 questions to determine if you are competent to provide medical treatment outside your usual area of expertise (Table 2). In Bobby’s case, Dr. F can consider these additional questions:

  • Am I comfortable doing this? Would I be comfortable with this scenario if Bobby were my child?
  • How extensive was my general residency training in child psychiatry?
  • How long ago was my last CAP experience?
  • Have I treated ADHD in adults, and am I familiar with stimulant medications?
  • What kind of supervision could I arrange, such as regular phone consultation with a CAP or pediatrician?
  • How helpful are other information sources, such as recent texts, journals, and medical Web sites?
  • What is my relationship with the family, and how would treating Bobby affect it?

Table 2

Should you provide treatment? 4 questions to ask yourself

How sure am I that I know what I don’t know?
How will I know when I should ask for help?
Do I have colleagues readily available for consultation if I need help?
Do I have a good track record for seeking consultation when I need it?

Advantages and benefits

So far, we’ve emphasized cautions, but Dr. F also should remember that she may offer patients services that general psychiatrists provide but that pediatricians might not do routinely. Among the possibilities:

  • Performing a diagnostic assessment that incorporates biopsychosocial factors.
  • Taking time to foster a strong doctor-patient relationship with the family.
  • Reserving time for medication-related psychoeducation.
  • Scheduling longer visits to discuss a child’s psychiatric problems and explore solutions.
  • Utilizing knowledge of and existing relationships with nonphysician therapists who could provide additional psychotherapy.

Dear Dr. Mossman:

I am an adult psychiatrist practicing in a geographically isolated area. I am working with the family of 10-year-old “Bobby” who is struggling with attention problems. Top notch neuropsychologic testing recommends a stimulant trial, but the local pediatrician is too busy to give Bobby adequate follow-up and attention.

I am an experienced psychopharmacologist but have not prescribed medication to children since residency. My relationship with the family is excellent, and the local pediatrician said that she would supervise me. If I choose to treat Bobby, what are the possible liability issues I should be aware of, and how can I address them?—Submitted by “Dr. F”

Dr. F’s question raises issues that come up whenever patients need treatment for conditions outside the few with which you are highly familiar. Although you can’t be an expert on every aspect of every patient’s treatment, psychiatrists shouldn’t practice outside their area of competence.

Thus, the main liability-related issue that Dr. F should ask herself is, “Can I treat Bobby competently?” Of course, whenever you decide to treat any patient, you should be able to answer “yes” to this question. When thinking about potential liability related to treating Bobby, Dr. F might also ask, “If a lawsuit occurred, how would my treatment of Bobby appear?” This article discusses key issues that arise when general psychiatrists treat children and the steps general psychiatrists can take to show that they are practicing prudently.

Problem: Not enough clinicians

Child and adolescent psychiatrists (CAPs) are in short supply.1,2 In 2001 the United States had 8.67 CAPs per 100,000 youths and 1.6 CAPs for every 1,000 youths with severe mental disorders.1 Studies suggest that the United States needs nearly twice that many CAPs.3 The shortage is especially severe in rural areas, but approximately one-half of metropolitan counties with populations of >250,000 have no CAPs.1 In much of the nation, finding CAPs who are accepting new patients is difficult, and child and adolescent psychiatric treatment often is delivered by pediatricians, family practitioners, psychiatric nurse practitioners, and general adult psychiatrists.

DO YOU HAVE A QUESTION ABOUT POSSIBLE LIABILITY?

  • Submit your malpractice-related questions to Dr. Mossman at [email protected].
  • Include your name, address, and practice location. If your question is chosen for publication, your name can be withheld by request.
  • All readers who submit questions will be included in quarterly drawings for a $50 gift certificate for Professional Risk Management Services, Inc’s online marketplace of risk management publications and resources (www.prms.com).

Children’s special medical issues

General psychiatrists know that children aren’t just little adults. CAPs develop skills and thinking styles during their 2 years of subspecialty fellowship training that are quite different from those used by their general psychiatric colleagues.

Communication. Children and adolescents who need psychiatric care often have limited verbal abilities. Working and communicating with these patients requires a different interactive style.

Information sources. CAPs learn to seek and assimilate clinically important information from many settings—especially a child’s home—where their patients interact with others.

Caution. Only a small subset of psychotropic medications that adult psychiatrists prescribe are FDA-approved for use in children (Table 1).4 Because we don’t know how psychotropic drugs affect brain development, CAPs sometimes are leery of giving kids the same medications that adult psychiatrists readily prescribe.

Table 1

FDA-approved drugs and dosages for ADHD in children and adults

Brand nameGeneric nameDrug classDosing forms (mg)Dosage rangeAge range
AdderallAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineIR stimulant5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, 15, 20, 305 to 40 mg3 to 18 years
Adderall XRAmphetamine-dextroamphetamineER stimulant5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 305 to 30 mg3 years to adult
ConcertaMethylphenidateER stimulant18, 27, 36, 5418 to 72 mg6 years to adult
DaytranaMethylphenidate transdermalStimulant10, 15, 20, 30 (patch)10 to 30 mg6 to 18 years
FocalinDexmethylphenidateIR stimulant2.5, 5, 102.5 to 10 mg bid6 to 17 years
Focalin XRDexmethylphenidateER stimulant5, 10, 15, 205 to 20 mg6 years to adult
Metadate CDMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 50, 6010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
RitalinMethylphenidateIR stimulant5, 10, 205 to 20 mg bid or tid6 to 18 years
Ritalin LAMethylphenidateER stimulant10, 20, 30, 4010 to 60 mg6 to 18 years
StratteraAtomoxetineSNRI10, 18, 25, 40, 60, 80, 10010 to 100 mg6 years to adult
VyvanseLisdexamfetamine dimesylateER stimulant (precursor)30, 50, 7030 to 70 mg6 years to adult
LA: long acting; CD: controlled delivery; ER, XR: extended release; IR: immediate release; SNRI: selective norepinephrine reuptake inhibitor
Source: Adapted from references 2,3

Different drugs. Some medications commonly taken by children are not often prescribed for adults, although this is changing as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is better recognized in adults.5,6

 

 

Dosages. Dosing psychotropics in adults is fairly standardized, but in children and adolescents dosages vary with age, body weight, and physical maturity.

Adverse effects. The side effects kids experience and the way they report them can differ markedly from adults and will vary with age and developmental maturity. Some issues related to monitoring children—such as appropriate cardiac screening before starting stimulants—are controversial and remain unsettled.7,8

Consider alternatives

Dr. F may be tempted to treat Bobby because of her preexisting, positive relationship with the child’s family and a laudable desire to help. But Dr. F needs to ask, “Is there really no other workable alternative for Bobby?” Some possibilities include:

  • Refer Bobby to a CAP in another community for initiation of treatment. Dr. F or Bobby’s pediatrician might safely continue care once a CAP establishes an effective treatment regimen.
  • Find another pediatrician who might have more time to provide the follow-up that Dr. F feels is necessary.
  • Decline to treat Bobby. Before doing this, Dr. F should consider what effect this refusal might have on her relationship with the family and the consequences for Bobby if his problems go untreated.
  • Consult a CAP from another community, describing the situation and clinical factors in detail without naming or identifying the patient, and then ask, “Is this really the best thing to do?”

From a liability standpoint, this last point may be crucial. If the CAP answers “yes,” Dr. F can document the alternatives she has considered and her consultation and discussion with the CAP colleague as evidence of prudent practice. Dr. F can also document any advice that she has received and her plans to follow it.

If you choose to treat

Presumably, Dr. F would not perform thoracic surgery or provide any treatment that is far outside a general psychiatrist’s competence except under the most dire circumstances. General psychiatrists receive child psychiatry training during residency, and treating children is within their scope of practice. Similarly, most elderly patients are treated by general psychiatrists, rather than graduates of geropsychiatry fellowships. Prescribing medication for Bobby is not grossly different from Dr. F’s other duties, and she might provide services that a pediatrician might not.

Ask yourself 4 questions to determine if you are competent to provide medical treatment outside your usual area of expertise (Table 2). In Bobby’s case, Dr. F can consider these additional questions:

  • Am I comfortable doing this? Would I be comfortable with this scenario if Bobby were my child?
  • How extensive was my general residency training in child psychiatry?
  • How long ago was my last CAP experience?
  • Have I treated ADHD in adults, and am I familiar with stimulant medications?
  • What kind of supervision could I arrange, such as regular phone consultation with a CAP or pediatrician?
  • How helpful are other information sources, such as recent texts, journals, and medical Web sites?
  • What is my relationship with the family, and how would treating Bobby affect it?

Table 2

Should you provide treatment? 4 questions to ask yourself

How sure am I that I know what I don’t know?
How will I know when I should ask for help?
Do I have colleagues readily available for consultation if I need help?
Do I have a good track record for seeking consultation when I need it?

Advantages and benefits

So far, we’ve emphasized cautions, but Dr. F also should remember that she may offer patients services that general psychiatrists provide but that pediatricians might not do routinely. Among the possibilities:

  • Performing a diagnostic assessment that incorporates biopsychosocial factors.
  • Taking time to foster a strong doctor-patient relationship with the family.
  • Reserving time for medication-related psychoeducation.
  • Scheduling longer visits to discuss a child’s psychiatric problems and explore solutions.
  • Utilizing knowledge of and existing relationships with nonphysician therapists who could provide additional psychotherapy.
References

1. Thomas CR, Holzer CE, III. The continuing shortage of child and adolescent psychiatrists. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2006;45:1023-31.

2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Mental health: a report of the Surgeon General. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health; 1999. Available at: http://www.surgeongeneral.gov/library/mentalhealth/home.html. Accessed August 20, 2008.

3. Levin A. Rural counties suffer from child psychiatry shortage. Psychiatr News 2006;42(14):4-41.

4. National Institute of Mental Health. Treatment of children with mental disorders. 2004. Available at: http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/childqa.cfm. Accessed August 2, 2008.

5. Wilens TE, Biederman J, Spencer TJ. Attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder across the lifespan. Annu Rev Med 2002;53:113-31.

6. Greenhill LL, Pliszka S, Dulcan MK, et al. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameter for the use of stimulant medications in the treatment of children, adolescents, and adults. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry. 2002;41(2 suppl):26S-49S.

7. Perrin JM, Friedman RA, Knilans TK. Cardiovascular monitoring and stimulant drugs for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Pediatrics 2008;122:451-3.

8. Vetter VL, Elia J, Erickson C, et al. Cardiovascular monitoring of children and adolescents with heart disease receiving medications for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder: A scientific statement from the American Heart Association Council on Cardiovascular Disease in the Young Congenital Cardiac Defects Committee and the Council on Cardiovascular Nursing. Circulation 2008;117:2407-23.

References

1. Thomas CR, Holzer CE, III. The continuing shortage of child and adolescent psychiatrists. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry 2006;45:1023-31.

2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Mental health: a report of the Surgeon General. Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health; 1999. Available at: http://www.surgeongeneral.gov/library/mentalhealth/home.html. Accessed August 20, 2008.

3. Levin A. Rural counties suffer from child psychiatry shortage. Psychiatr News 2006;42(14):4-41.

4. National Institute of Mental Health. Treatment of children with mental disorders. 2004. Available at: http://www.nimh.nih.gov/publicat/childqa.cfm. Accessed August 2, 2008.

5. Wilens TE, Biederman J, Spencer TJ. Attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder across the lifespan. Annu Rev Med 2002;53:113-31.

6. Greenhill LL, Pliszka S, Dulcan MK, et al. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Practice parameter for the use of stimulant medications in the treatment of children, adolescents, and adults. J Am Acad Child Adolesc Psychiatry. 2002;41(2 suppl):26S-49S.

7. Perrin JM, Friedman RA, Knilans TK. Cardiovascular monitoring and stimulant drugs for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder. Pediatrics 2008;122:451-3.

8. Vetter VL, Elia J, Erickson C, et al. Cardiovascular monitoring of children and adolescents with heart disease receiving medications for attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder: A scientific statement from the American Heart Association Council on Cardiovascular Disease in the Young Congenital Cardiac Defects Committee and the Council on Cardiovascular Nursing. Circulation 2008;117:2407-23.

Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Issue
Current Psychiatry - 07(10)
Page Number
53-56
Page Number
53-56
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Going outside your area of expertise: How far is too far?
Display Headline
Going outside your area of expertise: How far is too far?
Legacy Keywords
Douglas Mossman; pediatric psychiatry; liability;
Legacy Keywords
Douglas Mossman; pediatric psychiatry; liability;
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Article PDF Media